Features
High Performance, Low Power AVR® 8-Bit Microcontroller
Advanced RISC Architecture
120 Powerful Instructions – Most Single Clo ck Cycle Execution
32 x 8 General Purpose Working Registers
Fully Static Operation
Up to 20 MIPS Througput at 20 MHz
High Endurance Non-vo latile Memory segments
1K Bytes of In-System Self-programmable Flash progr am memory
64 Bytes EEPROM
64 Bytes Internal SRAM
Write/Erase Cycles: 10,000 Flash/100,000 EEPROM
Data retention: 20 Years at 85°C/100 Years at 25°C (see page 6)
Programming Lock for Self-Programming Flas h & EEPROM Data Security
Peripheral Features
One 8-bit Timer/Counter with Prescaler and Two PWM Channels
4-channel, 10-bit ADC with Internal Voltage Reference
Programmable Watchdog Timer with Separate On-chip Oscillator
On-chip Analog Comparator
Spec ia l Micr oc ontroller Features
debugWIRE On-chip Debug System
In-System Programmable via SPI Port
External and Internal Interrupt Sources
Low Power Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, and Power-down Modes
Enhanced Power-on Reset Circuit
Programmable Brown-out Detection Circu it wi th Software Disable Functi on
Internal Calibrated Oscillator
I/O and Packages
8-pin PDIP/SOIC: Six Programmable I/O Lines
10-pad MLF: Six Programmable I/O Lines
20-pad MLF: Six Programmable I/O Lines
Operating Voltage:
1.8 – 5.5V
Speed Grade:
0 – 4 MHz @ 1.8 – 5.5V
0 – 10 MHz @ 2.7 – 5.5V
0 – 20 MHz @ 4.5 – 5.5V
Industrial Temperature Range
Low Power Consumption
Active Mode:
190 µA at 1.8 V and 1 MHz
–Idle Mode:
24 µA at 1.8 V and 1 MHz
8-bit
Microcontroller
with 1K Bytes
In-System
Programmable
Flash
ATtiny13A
Rev. 8126F–AVR–05/12
28126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
1. Pin Configurations
Figure 1-1. Pinout of ATtiny13A
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
(PCINT5/RESET/ADC0/dW) PB5
(PCINT3/CLKI/ADC3) PB3
(PCINT4/ADC2) PB4
GND
VCC
PB2 (SCK/ADC1/T0/PCINT2)
PB1 (MISO/AIN1/OC0B/INT0/PCINT1)
PB0 (MOSI/AIN0/OC0A/PCINT0)
8-PDIP/SOIC
1
2
3
4
5
20-QFN/MLF
15
14
13
12
11
20
19
18
17
16
6
7
8
9
10
(PCINT5/RESET/ADC0/dW) PB5
(PCINT3/CLKI/ADC3) PB3
DNC
DNC
(PCINT4/ADC2) PB4
DNC
DNC
GND
DNC
DNC
VCC
PB2 (SCK/ADC1/T0/PCINT2)
DNC
PB1 (MISO/AIN1/OC0B/INT0/PCINT1)
PB0 (MOSI/AIN0/OC0A/PCINT0)
DNC
DNC
DNC
DNC
DNC
NOTE: Bottom pad should be soldered to ground.
DNC: Do Not Connect
1
2
3
4
5
10-QFN/MLF
10
9
8
7
6
(PCINT5/RESET/ADC0/dW) PB5
(PCINT3/CLKI/ADC3) PB3
DNC
(PCINT4/ADC2) PB4
GND
VCC
PB2 (SCK/ADC1/T0/PCINT2)
DNC
PB1 (MISO/AIN1/OC0B/INT0/PCINT1)
PB0 (MOSI/AIN0/OC0A/PCINT0)
NOTE: Bottom pad should be soldered to ground.
DNC: Do Not Connect
3
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
1.1 Pin Description
1.1.1 VCC Supply voltage.
1.1.2 GND Ground.
1.1.3 Port B (PB5:PB0)
Port B is a 6-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port B output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port B pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. Th e Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset co ndition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port B also serves the functions of various special features of the ATtiny13A as listed on page
55.
1.1.4 RESET Reset input. A low level on this pin for longer than the minimum pulse length will gen erate a
reset, even if the clock is not runn ing and prov ided the reset pin has not be en disabled . The min-
imum pulse length is given in Table 18-4 on page 120. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to
generate a reset.
The reset pin can also be used as a (weak) I/O pin.
48126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
2. Overview The ATtiny13A is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR enhanced RISC
architecture. By executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the ATtiny13A achieves
throughputs approa ching 1 MI PS per MHz a llowing th e system designe r to optimi ze power c on-
sumption versus processing speed.
2.1 Block Diagram
Figure 2-1. Block Diagram
PROGRAM
COUNTER
INTERNAL
OSCILLATOR
WATCHDOG
TIMER
STACK
POINTER
PROGRAM
FLASH
SRAM
MCU CONTROL
REGISTER
GENERAL
PURPOSE
REGISTERS
INSTRUCTION
REGISTER
TIMER/
COUNTER0
INSTRUCTION
DECODER
DATA DIR.
REG.PORT B
DATA REGISTER
PORT B
PROGRAMMING
LOGIC
TIMING AND
CONTROL
MCU STATUS
REGISTER
STATUS
REGISTER
ALU
PORT B DRIVERS
PB[0:5]
VCC
GND
CONTROL
LINES
8-BIT DATABUS
Z
ADC /
ANALOG COMPARATOR
INTERRUPT
UNIT
CALIBRATED
Y
X
RESET
CLKI
WATCHDOG
OSCILLATOR
DATA
EEPROM
5
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All 32
registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two independent
registers to be accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The resulting
architecture is more code efficient while achiev ing throughputs up to ten times faster than con-
ventional CISC microcontrollers.
The ATtiny13A pr ovides the following fe atures: 1K byte of In-System Programm able Flash, 64
bytes EEPROM, 64 bytes SRAM, 6 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working reg-
isters, one 8-bit Timer/Counter with compare modes, Internal and External Interrupts, a 4-
channel, 10-bit ADC, a programmable Watchdog Timer with internal Oscillator, and three soft-
ware selectable power saving modes. The Idle mode stops the CPU while allowing the SRAM,
Timer/Counter, ADC, Analog Comparator, and Interrupt system to continue functioning. The
Power-down mode saves the register contents, disabling all chip functions until the next Inter-
rupt or Hardware Reset. The ADC Noise Reduction mode stops the CPU and all I/O modules
except ADC, to minimize switching noise during ADC conversions.
The device is manufactured using Atmel’s high density non-volatile memory technology. The
On-chip ISP Flash allows the Program memory to be re-programmed In-System through an SPI
serial interface, by a conventional non-volatile memory programmer or by an On-chip boot code
running on the AVR core.
The ATtiny13A AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system development tools
including: C Compilers, Macro Assemblers, Program Debugger/Simulators, and Evaluation kits.
68126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
3. About
3.1 Resources A comprehensive set of drivers, applica tion note s, data sheets and description s on development
tools are available for download at http://www.atmel.com/avr.
3.2 Code Examples
This documentatio n contains simple co de examples that briefly show how to u se various parts of
the device. These code examp les assume that the part specific header file is included b efore
compilation. Be aware that not all C compiler vendors include bit definitions in the header files
and interrupt handlin g in C is com piler d epend ent. Plea se confir m with th e C com piler d ocume n-
tation for more details.
3.3 Data Retention
Reliability Qualification results show that the projected da ta retention failure rate is much less
than 1 PPM over 20 years at 85°C or 100 years at 25°C.
7
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
4. CPU Core This section discusses the AVR core architecture in general. The main function of the CPU core
is to ensure correct program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to access memories,
perform calculations, control peripherals, and handle interrupts.
4.1 Architectural Overview
Figure 4-1. Block Diagram of the AVR Architecture
In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR uses a Harvard architecture – with
separate memories and buses for program and data. Instructions in the Program memory are
executed w ith a sin gle le ve l pip e lining. While one instruc tion is being executed, the next instruc-
tion is pre-fetched from the Program memory. This concept enables instructions to be executed
in every clock cycle. The Program memory is In-System Reprogrammable Flash memory.
Flash
Program
Memory
Instruction
Register
Instruction
Decoder
Program
Counter
Control Lines
32 x 8
General
Purpose
Registrers
ALU
Status
and Control
I/O Lines
EEPROM
Data Bus 8-bit
Data
SRAM
Direct Addressing
Indirect Addressing
Interrupt
Unit
Watchdog
Timer
Analog
Comparator
I/O Module 2
I/O Module1
I/O Module n
88126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The fast-access Register File contains 32 x 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single
clock cycle access time. This allows single-cycle Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation. In a typ-
ical ALU operation, two operands are output from the Regi ster File, the op eration is exec uted,
and the result is stored back in the Register File – in one clock cycle.
Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for Data
Space addressing – enabling efficien t address calculations. One of the these addre ss pointers
can also be used as an address pointer for look up ta bles in Flash Program memory. These
added function registers are the 16-bit X-, Y-, and Z-register , described later in this section.
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a constant and
a register. Single r egister o perations can also be executed in the ALU. After an arithmetic opera-
tion, the Status Register is updated to reflect information about the result of the operation.
Program flow is provided by conditional and uncon ditional jump and call instructions, able to
directly address the whole address space. Most AVR instructions have a single 16-bit word for-
mat. Every Program memory address contains a 16- or 32-bit instruction.
During interrupts and subroutine ca lls, the return address Program Counter (PC) is stored on the
Stack. The Stack is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the Stack
size is only limited by the total SRAM size and the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must
initialize the SP in the Reset routine (before subroutines or interrupts are executed). The Stack
Pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O space. The data SRAM can easily be accessed
through the five different addressing modes supported in the AVR architecture.
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and r egular memory maps.
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional Global
Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register. All interrupts have a separate Interrupt Vector in the
Interrupt Vector table. The interrupts have priority in accordance with their Interrupt Vector posi-
tion. The lower the Interrupt Vector address, the higher the priority.
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control Regis-
ters, SPI, and other I/O fun ctions. The I/O memory can be access ed directly, or as the Data
Space locations following those of the Register File, 0x20 - 0x5F.
4.2 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general purpose
working registers. Within a single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between general purpose
registers or between a registe r an d an immed iate ar e executed . Th e ALU opera tio ns are divided
into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bit-functions. Some im plementations of the
architecture also provide a powerful multiplier supporting both signed/unsigned multiplication
and fractional format. See the “Instruction Set” section for a detailed description.
4.3 Status Register
The Status Register contai ns information a bout the r esult of th e most r ecently executed ari thme-
tic instruction. This information can be used for altering program flow in order to perform
conditional operations. Note that the Status Register is updated after all ALU operations, as
specified in the Instruction Set Refe rence. This wil l in man y ca ses re move th e nee d for using the
dedicated compare instructions, resulting in faster and more compact code.
The Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored
when returning from an inte rr up t. T his mu st be hand le d by so ftware.
9
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
4.3.1 SREG – Status Register
Bit 7 – I: Global Interrupt Enable
The Global Interrupt Enable bit must be set for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual inter-
rupt enable control is then performed in separate control registers. If the Global Interrupt Enable
Register is cleared, none of the interrupts are enabled independent of the individual interrupt
enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an interrupt has occurred, and is set by
the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also be set and cleared by
the application with the SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the instruction set reference.
Bit 6 – T: Bit Copy Storage
The Bit Copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source or desti-
nation for the operated bit. A bit from a register in the Register File can be copied into T by the
BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a r egister in the Register File by th e
BLD instruction.
Bit 5 – H: Half Carry Flag
The Half Carry Flag H indicates a Half Carry in some arithmetic operations. Half Carry is useful
in BCD arithmetic. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
Bit 4 – S: Sign Bit, S = N V
The S-bit is always an exclusive or betwee n the Negative Flag N and the Two’s Complement
Overflow Flag V. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
Bit 3 – V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag
The Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See the
“Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
Bit 2 – N: Negative Flag
The Negative Flag N indicates a negative result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the
“Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
Bit 1 – Z: Zero Flag
The Zero Flag Z indicates a zero result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction
Set Description” for detailed information.
Bit 0 – C: Carry Flag
The Carry Flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set
Description” for detailed information.
Bit 76543210
0x3F I T H S V N Z C SREG
Read/Write R/W R/W R/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
4.4 General Purpose Register File
The Register File is optimized for the AVR Enhanced RISC instruc tion set. In order t o achieve
the required performance and flexibility, the following input/output schemes are supported by the
Register File:
One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input
Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input
Two 8-bit output operands and one 16-bit result input
One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input
Figure 4-2 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU.
Figure 4-2. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers
Most of the instructions operating on the Register File have direct access to all registers, and
most of them are single cycle instructions.
As shown in Figure 4-2 on page 10, each registe r is also assigned a Da ta memory address,
mapping them directly into the first 32 locations of the user Data Space. Although not being
physically implemented as SRAM locations, this memory organization provides great flexibility in
access of the registers, as the X-, Y- and Z-pointer registers can be set to index any register in
the file.
4.4.1 The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register
The register s R26.. R31 ha ve som e adde d func tions to their general purpose usage. These reg-
isters are 16-bit address pointers for indirect ad dressing of the data space. The three indirect
address registers X, Y, and Z are defined as described in Figure 4-3 on page 11.
7 0 Addr.
R0 0x00
R1 0x01
R2 0x02
R13 0x0D
General R14 0x0E
Purpose R15 0x0F
Working R16 0x10
Registers R17 0x11
R26 0x1A X-register Low Byte
R27 0x1B X-register High Byte
R28 0x1C Y-register Low Byte
R29 0x1D Y-register High Byte
R30 0x1E Z-register Low Byte
R31 0x1F Z-register High Byte
11
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 4-3. The X-, Y-, and Z-registers
In the different addr essing modes these ad dr ess register s have functions a s fixed disp lacem ent,
automatic increment, and automatic decrement (see the instruction set reference for details).
4.5 Stack Pointer The Stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for storing
return addresses after interrupts and subroutine calls. The Stack Pointer Register always points
to the top of the Stack. Note that the Sta ck is impl emented as gr owing from hig her memor y loca-
tions to lower memory locations. This implies that a Stack PUSH command decr ease s th e Stack
Pointer.
The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM Stack area where the Subroutine and Interrupt
Stacks are located. This Stack space in the data SRAM is automaticall defined to the last
address in SRAM during power on reset. The Stack Pointer must be set to point above 0x60.
The Stack Pointer is decremented by one when data is pushed onto the Stack with the PUSH
instruction, and it is decremented by two when the return address is pushed onto the Stack with
subroutine call or interrupt. The Stack Pointer is incremented by one when data is popped from
the Stack with the POP instruction, and it is incremented by two when data is popped from the
Stack with return from subroutine RET or return from interrupt RETI.
The AVR Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space. The number of
bits actually used is implementation dependent. Note that the data space in some implementa-
tions of the AVR architecture is so small that only SPL is needed. In this case, the SPH Register
will not be present.
4.5.1 SPL – Stack Pointer Low
15 XH XL 0
X-register 707 0
R27 (0x1B) R26 (0x1A)
15 YH YL 0
Y-register 707 0
R29 (0x1D) R28 (0x1C)
15 ZH ZL 0
Z-register 7070
R31 (0x1F) R30 (0x1E)
Bit 76543210
0x3D SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 SPL
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value10011111
12 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
4.6 Instruction Execution Timing
This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution. The AVR
CPU is driven by the CPU clock clkCPU, directly generated fro m the selected clock source for the
chip. No internal clock division is used.
Figure 4-4 on page 12 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled
by the Harvard architecture and the fast access Registe r File conc ept. This is the basic pipelin-
ing concept to obtain up to 1 MIP S per MHz with the corre sponding uniq ue results for fu nctions
per cost, functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit.
Figure 4-4. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions
Figure 4-5 on page 12 shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single clock
cycle an ALU operation using two register operands is executed, and the result is stored back to
the destination register.
Figure 4-5. Single Cycle ALU Operation
4.7 Reset and Interrupt Handling
The AVR provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate Reset
Vector each have a separate Program Vector in the Program memo ry space. All interrupts are
assigned individual enable bits which must be writte n logic one togeth er with the Global Inter rupt
Enable bit in the Status Register in order to enable the interrupt.
The lowest addresses in the Program memory space are by default defined as the Reset a nd
Interrupt Vectors. The complete list of vectors is shown in “Interrupts” on page 45. The list also
determines the priority levels of the different interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the
clk
1st Instruction Fetch
1st Instruction Execute
2nd Instruction Fetch
2nd Instruction Execute
3rd Instruction Fetch
3rd Instruction Execute
4th Instruction Fetch
T1 T2 T3 T4
CPU
Total Execution Time
Register Operands Fetch
ALU Operation Execute
Result Write Back
T1 T2 T3 T4
clk
CPU
13
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 – the External Interrupt Request
0.
When an interrupt occurs, the Glob al Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts are dis-
abled. The user software can write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. All enabled
interrupts can then interrupt the current interrupt routine. The I-bit is au tomatically set when a
Return from Interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed.
There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that sets the
Interrupt Flag. For these interrupts, the Program Counter is v ect or ed t o th e actual Interrupt Vec-
tor in order to execute the interrupt handling routine, and hardware clears th e corresponding
Interrupt Flag. Interrupt Flag s can also be cleared by writing a logic one to the flag bit position(s)
to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while the corresponding interrupt enable bit is
cleared, the Interrupt Flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is
cleared by software. Similarly, if one or more interrupt conditions occur while the Global Interrupt
Enable bit is cleared, the corresponding Interrupt Flag(s) will be set and remembered until the
Global Interrupt Enable bit is set, and will then be executed by order of priority.
The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present. The se
interrupts do not necessarily have Interrupt Flags. If the interrup t condition disappears be fore the
interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will not be triggered.
When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one
more instruction before any pending interrupt is serve d.
Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine, nor
restored when returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.
When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately disabled.
No interrupt will be executed after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs simultaneously with the
CLI instruction. The following example shows how this can be used to avoid interrupt s during the
timed EEPROM write sequence.
Note: See “Code Examples” on page 6.
Assembly Code Example
in r16, SREG ; store SREG value
cli ; disable interrupts during timed sequence
sbi EECR, EEMPE ; start EEPROM write
sbi EECR, EEPE
out SREG, r16 ; restore SREG value (I-bit)
C Code Example
char cSREG;
cSREG = SREG; /* store SREG value */
/* disable interrupts during timed sequence */
__disable_interrupt();
EECR |= (1<<EEMPE); /* start EEPROM write */
EECR |= (1<<EEPE);
SREG = cSREG; /* restore SREG value (I-bit) */
14 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be exe-
cuted before any pending interrupts, as shown in this example.
Note: See “Code Examples” on page 6.
4.7.1 Interrupt Response Time
The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR interrupts is four clock cycles mini-
mum. After four clock cycles the Program Vector address for the actual inter rupt handling routine
is executed. During this four clock cycle period, the Program Counter is pushed onto the Stack.
The vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine, and this jump takes three clock cycles. If
an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle instruction, this instruction is completed
before the interrupt is served. If an interrupt occurs when the MCU is in sleep mode, the interrupt
execution response time is increased b y four clock cycles. This increase comes in addition to the
start-up time from the selected sleep mode.
A return from an interrupt handling routine takes four clock cycles. During these four clock
cycles, the Program Counter (two bytes) is popped back from the Stack, the Stack Pointer is
incremented by two, and the I-bit in SREG is set.
Assembly Code Example
sei ; set Global Interrupt Enable
sleep; enter sleep, waiting for interrupt
; note: will enter sleep before any pending
; interrupt(s)
C Code Example
__enable_interrupt(); /* set Global Interrupt Enable */
__sleep(); /* enter sleep, waiting for interrupt */
/* note: will enter sleep before any pending interrupt(s) */
15
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
5. Memories This section describes the different memo ries in the ATtiny13A. The AVR architecture has two
main memory spaces, the Data memory and the Program memory space. In addition, the
ATtiny13A features an EEPROM M emory for data storage. All three memory spaces are linear
and regular.
5.1 In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory
The ATtiny 13A contains 1K byt e On-chip In-System Reprogrammable Flash memory for pro-
gram storage. Since all AVR instructions are 16 or 32 bits wide, the Flash is organized as 512 x
16.
The Flash memory has an endurance of at least 10,000 write/erase cycles. The ATtiny13A Pro-
gram Counter (PC) is nine bits wide, thus addressing the 512 Program memory locations.
“Memory Programming” on page 103 contains a detailed description on Flash data serial down-
loading using the SPI pins.
Constant tables ca n be allocated within the entire Progra m memory address space (see the
LPM – Load Program memory instruction description).
Timing diagrams for instruction fetch and execution are presented in “Instruction Execution Tim-
ing” on page 12.
Figure 5-1. Program Memory Map
5.2 SRAM Data Memory
Figure 5-2 on page 16 shows how the ATtiny13A SRAM Memory is organized.
The lower 160 Data memory locations address both the Register File, the I/O memory and the
internal data SRAM. The first 32 locations address the Register File, the next 64 locations the
standard I/O memory, and the last 64 locations address the internal data SRAM.
The five different address ing modes for the Data memory cov er: Direct, Indirect with Displace-
ment, Indirect, Indirect with Pre-decrement, and Indirect with Post-increment. In the Register
File, registers R26 to R31 feature the indirect addressing pointer registers.
The direct addressing reaches the entire data space.
The Indirect with Displacement mo de reaches 63 addre ss locations from the base address given
by the Y- or Z-register.
0x0000
0x01FF
Program Memory
16 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
When using register indirect addressing modes with automatic pre-decrement and post-incre-
ment, the address registers X, Y, and Z ar e decremented or incremented.
The 32 general purpose working registers, 64 I/O Registers, and the 64 bytes of in ternal data
SRAM in the ATtiny13A are all accessible through all these addressing modes. The Register
File is described in “General Purpose Register File” on page 10.
Figure 5-2. Data Memor y Map
5.2.1 Data Memory Access Times
This section describes the general access timing concepts for internal memory access. The
internal data SRAM access is performed in two clkCPU cycles as described in Fi gu r e 5- 3.
Figure 5-3. On-chip Data SRAM Access Cycles
5.3 EEPROM Data Memo ry
The ATtiny13A contains 64 bytes of data EEPROM memory. It is organized as a separate data
space, in which single bytes can be read and written. The EEPROM has an endurance of at
least 100,000 write/erase cycles. The access between the EEPROM and the CPU is described
in the following, specifying the EEPROM Address Registers, the EEPROM Data Register, and
the EEPROM Control Register. For a detailed description of Serial data downloading to the
EEPROM, see page 106.
32 Registers
64 I/O Registers
Internal SRAM
(64 x 8)
0x0000 - 0x001F
0x0020 - 0x005F
0x009F
0x0060
Data Memory
clk
WR
RD
Data
Data
Address
Address valid
T1 T2 T3
Compute Address
Read Write
CPU
Memory Access Instruction Next Instruction
17
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
5.3.1 EEPROM Read/Write Access
The EEPROM Access Registers are accessible in the I/O space.
The write access times for the EEPROM are given in Table 5-1 on page 21. A self-timing func-
tion, however, lets the user software detect when the next byte can be written. If the user code
contains instructions that write the EEPROM, some precautions must be taken. In heavily fil-
tered power supplies, VCC is likely to rise or fall slowly on Power-up/down. This causes the
device for some period of time to run at a voltage lower than specified as minimum for the clock
frequency used. See “Preventing EEPROM Co rruption” on page 19 for details on how to avoid
problems in these situations.
In order to prevent unintentional EEPROM writes, a specific write procedure must be followed.
Refer to “Atomic Byte Programming” on pa ge 17 and “Split Byte Programming” on page 17 for
details on this.
When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four clock cycles before the next instruction is
executed. When the EEPROM is written, the CPU is halted for two clock cycles before the next
instruction is executed.
5.3.2 Atomic Byte Programming
Using Atomic Byte Programming is the simplest mode. When writing a byte to the EEPRO M, the
user must write the address into the EEARL Register and data into EEDR Register. If the
EEPMn bits are zero, writing EEPE (within four cycles after EEMPE is written) will trigger the
erase/write operation. Both the erase and write cycle are done in one operation and the total
programming time is given in Table 5-1 on page 21. The EEPE bit remains set until the erase
and write operations are completed. While the device is busy with programming, it is not possi-
ble to do any other EEPROM operations.
5.3.3 Split Byte Programming
It is possible to split the erase and write cycle in two different operations. This may be useful if
the system requires short access time for some limited period of time (typically if the power sup-
ply voltage falls). In order to take advantage of this method, it is required that the locations to be
written have been erased before the write operation. But since the erase and write operations
are split, it is possib le to do the erase operations when th e system allows doing time-critical
operations (typically after Power-up).
5.3.4 Erase To erase a byte, the address must be written to EEARL. If the EEPMn bits are 0b01, writing the
EEPE (within four cycles after EEMPE is written) will trigger the erase operation only (program-
ming time is given in Table 5-1 on page 21). The EEPE bit remains set until the erase operation
completes. While the device is busy programming, it is not possible to do any other EEPROM
operations.
5.3.5 Write To write a location, the user must write the address into EEARL and the data into EEDR. If the
EEPMn bits are 0b10, writing the EEPE (within four cycles after EEMPE is written) will trigger
the write operation o nly (programming time is given in Table 5-1 on page 21). The EEPE bit
remains set until the write operation completes . If the loc ation to be written has not been erased
before write, the data that is stored must be considered as lost. While the device is bu sy with
programming, it is not possible to do any other EEPROM operations.
18 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The calibrated Oscillator is used to time the EEPROM accesses. Make sure the Oscillator f re-
quency is within the requirements described in “OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register” on
page 27.
The following code exam ples sho w one asse mbly and one C function for erase, write, or atomic
write of the EEPROM. The examples assume that interrupts are controlled (e.g., by disabling
interrupts globally) so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these functions.
Note: See “Code Examples” on page 6.
Assembly Code Example
EEPROM_write:
; Wait for completion of previous write
sbic EECR,EEPE
rjmp EEPROM_write
; Set Programming mode
ldi r16, (0<<EEPM1)|(0<<EEPM0)
out EECR, r16
; Set up address (r17) in address register
out EEARL, r17
; Write data (r16) to data register
out EEDR,r16
; Write logical one to EEMPE
sbi EECR,EEMPE
; Start eeprom write by setting EEPE
sbi EECR,EEPE
ret
C Code Example
void EEPROM_write(unsigned char ucAddress, unsigned char ucData)
{
/* Wait for completion of previous write */
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))
;
/* Set Programming mode */
EECR = (0<<EEPM1)|(0>>EEPM0)
/* Set up address and data registers */
EEARL = ucAddress;
EEDR = ucData;
/* Write logical one to EEMPE */
EECR |= (1<<EEMPE);
/* Start eeprom write by setting EEPE */
EECR |= (1<<EEPE);
}
19
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The next code examples show assembly and C functions for reading the EEPROM. The exam-
ples assume that interrupts are controlled so that no interrupts will occur during execution of
these functions.
Note: See “Code Examples” on page 6.
5.3.6 Preventing EEPROM Corruption
During periods of low VCC, the EEPROM data can be corrupted because the supply voltage is
too low for the CPU and the EEPRO M to operate properly. These issues a re the same as for
board level systems using EEPROM, and the same design solutions should be applied.
An EEPROM data co rrup tio n ca n b e caused by two situation s wh en th e vo ltage is too low. First,
a regular write sequence to the EEPROM requires a minimum voltage to opera te correctly. Sec-
ondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage is too low.
EEPROM data corruption can easily be avoided by following this design recommendation:
Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can
be done by enab ling the intern al Brown-out De tector (BOD). If the detection level of the internal
BOD does not match the needed detectio n level, an e xternal low VCC reset protection circuit can
be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write operation will be com-
pleted provided that the po wer supply voltage is sufficient.
Assembly Code Example
EEPROM_read:
; Wait for completion of previous write
sbic EECR,EEPE
rjmp EEPROM_read
; Set up address (r17) in address register
out EEARL, r17
; Start eeprom read by writing EERE
sbi EECR,EERE
; Read data from data register
in r16,EEDR
ret
C Code Example
unsigned char EEPROM_read(unsigned char ucAddress)
{
/* Wait for completion of previous write */
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))
;
/* Set up address register */
EEARL = ucAddress;
/* Start eeprom read by writing EERE */
EECR |= (1<<EERE);
/* Return data from data register */
return EEDR;
}
20 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
5.4 I/O Memory The I/O space defin itio n of th e AT tiny 13 A is sho wn in “Register Summary” on page 158.
All ATtiny13A I/Os and peripherals are placed in the I/O space. All I/O locations may be
accessed by the LD/L DS/LDD and ST/STS/STD in structions, transferring dat a between the 32
general purpose working registers and the I/O space. I/O Registers within the address range
0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instru ctions. In these registers, the
value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. Refer to the
instruction set section for more details. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the
I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O Registers as data space using
LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses.
For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed.
Reserved I/O memory addresses should never be written.
Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most
other AVRs, the CBI and SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore
be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with reg-
isters 0x00 to 0x1F only.
The I/O and Periphera ls Control Registers are explained in later sections.
5.5 Register Description
5.5.1 EEARL – EEPROM Address Register
Bits 7:6 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bits 5:0 – EEAR[5:0]: EEPROM Address
The EEPROM Address Register – EEARL – specifies the EEPROM address in the 64 bytes
EEPROM space. The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly between 0 and 63. The initial
value of EEARL is undefined. A proper value must be written before the EEPROM may be
accessed.
5.5.2 EEDR – EEPROM Data Register
Bits 7:0 – EEDR[7:0]: EEPROM Data
For the EEPROM write operation the EEDR Register contains the data to be written to the
EEPROM in the address given by the EEARL Register. For the EEPROM read operation, the
EEDR contains the data read out from the EEPROM at the address given by EEARL.
Bit 76543210
0x1E EEAR5 EEAR4 EEAR3 EEAR2 EEAR1 EEAR0 EEARL
Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 X X X X X X
Bit 76543210
0x1D EEDR7 EEDR6 EEDR5 EEDR4 EEDR3 EEDR2 EEDR1 EEDR0 EEDR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Valu e X X X X X X X X
21
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
5.5.3 EECR – EEPROM Control Register
Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use and will alwa ys read as 0 in ATtiny13A. For compatibility with
future AVR devices, always write this bit to zero. After reading, mask out this bit.
Bit 6 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bits 5:4 – EEPM[1:0]: EEPROM Programming Mode Bits
The EEPROM Programming mode bits setting defines which programming action that will be
triggered when writing EEPE. It is possible to program data in one atomic ope ration (erase the
old value and program the new value) or to split the Erase and Write operations in two different
operations. The Programming times for the different modes are shown in Table 5-1 on page 21.
While EEPE is set, any write to EEPMn will be ignored. During reset, the EEPMn bits will be
reset to 0b00 unless the EEPROM is busy programming.
Bit 3 – EERIE: EEPROM Ready Interrupt Enable
Writing EERIE to one enables the EEPROM Ready Interrupt if the I-bit in SREG is set. Writing
EERIE to zero disables the interrupt. The EEPROM Ready Interrupt generates a constant inter-
rupt when Non-volatile memory is ready for programming.
Bit 2 – EEMPE: EEPROM Master Program Enable
The EEMPE bit determines whether writing EEPE to one will have effect or not.
When EEMPE is set, setting EEPE within four clock cycles will program the EEPROM a t the
selected address. If EEMPE is zero, setting EEPE will have no effect. When EEMPE has been
written to one by software, hardware clears the bit to zero after four clock cycles.
Bit 1 – EEPE: EEPROM Program Enable
The EEPROM Program Enable Signal EEPE is the programming enable signal to the EEPROM.
When EEPE is written, the EEPROM will be programmed according to the EEPMn bits setting.
The EEMPE bit must be written to one b efore a logical one is written to EEPE, otherwise no
EEPROM write takes place. When the write access time has elapsed, the EEPE bit is cleared by
hardware. When EEPE has been set, the CPU is halted for two cycles before the next instruction
is executed.
Bit 76543210
0x1C EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMPE EEPE EERE EECR
Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 X X 0 0 X 0
Table 5-1. EEPROM Mode Bits
EEPM1 EEPM0 Programming
Time Operation
0 0 3.4 ms Erase and Write in one operation (Atomic Operation)
0 1 1.8 ms Erase Onl y
1 0 1.8 ms Write Only
1 1 Reserved for future use
22 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Bit 0 – EERE: EEPROM Read Enable
The EEPROM Read Enable Signal – EERE – is the read strobe to the EEPROM. When the cor-
rect address is set up in the EEARL Register, the EERE bit must be written to one to trigger the
EEPROM read. The EEPROM read access takes one instruction, and the requested data is
available immediately. When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four cycles before the
next instruction is executed. The user should poll the EEPE bit before starting the read opera-
tion. If a write operation is in progress, it is neither possible to read the EEPROM, nor to change
the EEARL Register.
23
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
6. System Clock and Clock Options
6.1 Clock Systems and their Distribution
Figure 6-1 presents the principal clock systems in the AVR and their distribution. All of the clocks
need not be active at a given time. In order to r educe power co nsumpt ion, th e clo cks to modul es
not being used can be halted by using different sleep modes, as described in “Power Manage-
ment and Sleep Modes” on page 30. The clock systems are detailed below.
Figure 6-1. Clock Distribution
6.1.1 CPU Clock – clkCPU
The CPU clock is routed to parts of the system concerned with operation of the AVR core.
Examples of such modules are the General Purpose Register File, the Status Register and the
Data memory holding the Stack Pointer. Halting the CPU clock inhibits the core from performing
general operations and calculations.
6.1.2 I/O Cloc k – clkI/O
The I/O clock is used by the majority o f the I/O modules, like T imer/Counter. The I/O clock is
also used by the External Interrupt module, but note that some external interrupts are detected
by asynchronous logic, allowing such interrupts to be detected even if the I/O clock is halted.
6.1.3 Flash Clock – clkFLASH
The Flash clock controls oper ation of the Fl ash interface. The Flash clock is usually active simul-
taneously with the CPU clock.
General I/O
Modules CPU Core RAM
clk
I/O
AVR Clock
Control Unit clk
CPU
Flash and
EEPROM
clk
FLASH
Source clock
W atchdog Timer
Watchdog
Oscillator
Reset Logic
Clock
Multiplexer
Watchdog clock
Calibrated RC
Oscillator
External Clock
ADC
clk
ADC
24 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
6.1.4 ADC Clock – clkADC
The ADC is provided with a dedicated clock domain. This allows halting the CPU and I/O clocks
in order to reduce noise generated by digital circuitry. This gives more accurate ADC conversion
results.
6.2 Clock SourcesThe device has the following clock source opti ons, selectable by Flash fuse bits as shown
below. The clock from the se lected so urce is input to the AVR clock g enera to r, an d r oute d to the
appropriate modules.
Note: 1. For all fuses “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means progra mmed .
The various choices for each clocking option is given in the following sections. When the CPU
wakes up from Power-down or Power-save, the selected clock source is used to time the start-
up, ensuring stable Oscillator operation before instruction execution starts. When the CPU starts
from reset, there is an additional delay allowing the power to reach a stable level before com-
mencing normal operation. The Watchdog Oscillator is used for timing this real-time part of the
start-up time. The number of WDT Oscillator cycles used for each time-out is shown in Table 6-
2.
6.2.1 External ClockTo drive the devic e from a n exter nal cl ock source, CLKI should be driven as shown in Figure 6-
2. To run the device on an external clock, the CKSEL fuses must be programmed to “00”.
Figure 6-2. External Clock Drive Configuration
Table 6-1. Device Clocking Options Select
Device Clocking Option CKSEL[1:0](1)
External Clock (see page 24)00
Calibrat e d In te rn al 4.8/9.6 MHz Oscillator (s ee page 25)01, 10
Internal 128 kHz Oscillator (see page 26)11
Table 6-2. Number of Watchdog Oscillator Cycles
Typ Time-out Number of Cycles
4 ms 512
64 ms 8K (8,192)
EXTERNAL
CLOCK
SIGNAL
CLKI
GND
25
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
When this clock source is selected, start-u p times are dete rmin ed by th e SUT fuses as shown in
Table 6-3.
When applying an external clock, it is required to avoid sudden changes in the applied clock fre-
quency to ensure stable operation of the MCU. A variation in frequency of more than 2% from
one clock cycle to the next can lead to unpredictable behavior. It is required to ensure that the
MCU is kept in Reset during such changes in the clock frequency.
Note that the System Clock Prescaler can be used to implemen t run-time changes of th e internal
clock frequency while still ensuring stable operation. Refer to “System Clock Prescaler” on page
26 for details.
6.2.2 Calibrated Internal 4.8/9.6 MHz Oscillator
The calibrated internal oscillator provides a 4.8 or 9.6 MHz clock source. The frequency is nomi-
nal at 3V and 25°C. If the frequency exceeds the specification of the device (depends on VCC),
the CKDIV8 fuse m ust be progra mmed so that the internal clock is divided by 8 during start-up.
See “System Clock Prescaler” on page 26. for more details.
The internal oscillator is selected as the system clock by programming the CKSEL fuses as
shown in Table 6-4. If selected, it will operate with no external components.
Note: 1. The device is shipped with this option selected.
During reset, hardware loads the calibration data into the OSCCAL register and thereby auto-
matically calibrates the oscillator. There are separate calibration bytes for 4.8 and 9.6 MHz
operation but only one is automatically loaded during reset (see section “Calibration Bytes ” on
page 105). This is becaus e th e o nly d iff er en ce b e t ween 4.8 MHz and 9.6 MHz mode is an inter-
nal clock divider.
By changing the OSCCAL register from SW, see “OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register” on
page 27, it is possible to get a higher calibration accuracy than by using the factory calibration.
See “Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator Accuracy” on page 119.
When this oscillator is used as the chip clock, the Watchdog Os cillator will still be used for the
Watchdog Timer and for the Reset Time-out. For more information on the pre-programmed cali-
bration value, see the section “Calibration Bytes” on page 105.
Table 6-3. Start-up Times for the External Clock Selection
SUT[1:0] Start-up Time from
Power-down and Power-save Additional Delay
from Reset Recommended
Usage
00 6 CK 14CK BOD enabled
01 6 CK 14CK + 4 ms Fast rising power
10 6 CK 14CK + 64 ms Slowly rising power
11 Reserved
Table 6-4. Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Operating Modes
CKSEL[1:0] Nominal Frequency
10(1) 9.6 MHz
01 4.8 MHz
26 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
When this Oscillator is selected, start-up tim es are determined by the SUT fuses as shown in
Table 6-5.
Notes: 1. The device is shipped with this option selected.
2. If the RSTDISBL fuse is programmed, this start -up time will be increased to 14CK + 4 ms to
ensure programming mode can be entered.
6.2.3 Inte rnal 128 kHz Oscillator
The 128 kHz internal Oscillator is a low power Oscillator provid ing a clock of 128 kHz. T he fre-
quency depends on supply voltage, temperature and batch variations. This clock may be select
as the system clock by programming the CKSEL fuses to “11”.
When this clock source is selected, start-u p times are dete rmin ed by th e SUT fuses as shown in
Table 6-6.
Note: 1. If the RSTDISBL fuse is programmed, this st art -up time will be increased to 14CK + 4 ms to
ensure programming mode can be entered.
6.2.4 Default Clock Source
The device is shipped with CKSEL = “10”, SUT = “10”, and CKDIV8 programmed. The default
clock source setting is therefore the Internal RC Oscillator running at 9.6 MHz with longest start-
up time and an initial system clock presca ling of 8. This default setting ensures that all users can
make thei r desired clock source setting using an In-System or High-voltage Programmer.
6.3 System Clock Prescaler
The ATtiny13A system clock can be divided by setting the “CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register”
on page 28. This feature can be used to decrease power consumption wh en the require men t for
processing power is low. This can be used with all clock source options, and it will affect the
clock frequency of the CPU and all synchronous peripherals. clkI/O, clkADC, clkCPU, and clkFLASH
are divided by a factor as shown in Table 6-8 on page 28.
Table 6-5. Start-up Times for the Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Clock Selection
SUT[1:0] Start-up Time
from Power-down Additional Delay from
Reset (VCC = 5.0V) Recommended Usage
00 6 CK 14CK(2) BOD enabled
01 6 CK 14CK + 4 ms Fast rising power
10(1) 6 CK 14CK + 64 ms Slowly rising power
11 Reserved
Table 6-6. Start-up Times for the 128 k Hz Internal Oscillator
SUT[1:0] Start-up Time from
Power-down and Power-save Additional Delay
from Reset Recommended
Usage
00 6 CK 14CK(1) BOD enabled
01 6 CK 14CK + 4 ms Fast rising power
10 6 CK 14CK + 64 ms Slowly rising power
11 Reserved
27
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
6.3.1 Switching Time
When switching between prescaler settings, the System Clock Prescaler ensures that no
glitches occur in the clock system and that no intermediate frequency is higher than neither the
clock frequency corresponding to the previous setting, nor the clock frequency corresponding to
the new setting.
The ripple counter that implements the prescaler runs at the frequency of the undivided clock,
which may be faster than the CPU’s clock frequency. Hence, it is not possible to determine the
state of the prescaler – even if it were readable, and the exact time it takes to switch from one
clock division to another cannot be exactly predicted.
From the time the CLKPS values are written, it takes between T1 + T2 and T1 + 2*T2 before the
new clock frequency is active. In this interval, 2 active clock edges are pr oduced. Here, T1 is the
previous clock period, and T2 is the period corresponding to the new prescaler setting.
6.4 Register Description
6.4.1 OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register
Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved bit in ATtiny13A and it will always read zero.
Bits 6:0 – CAL[6:0]: Oscillator Calibration Value
Writing the calibration byte to this address will trim the internal Oscillator to remove process vari-
ations from the Oscillator frequency. This is done automatically during Chip Reset. When
OSCCAL is zero, the lowest available frequency is chosen. Writing non-zero values to th is regis-
ter will increase the frequency of the internal Oscillator. Writing 0x7F to the register gives the
highest available frequency.
The calibrated Oscillator is used to time EEPROM and Flash access. If EEPROM or Flash is
written, do not calibrate to more than 10% above the nominal frequency. Otherwise, the
EEPROM or Flash write may fail. Note that the Oscillator is intended for calibration to 9.6 MHz or
4.8 MHz. Tuning to other values is not guaranteed, as indicated in Table 6-7 below.
To ensure stable o peration of the MCU the calibration valu e shou ld be chang ed in small ste ps. A
variation in frequency of more than 2% from one cycle to the next can lead to unpredicatble
behavior. Changes in OSCCAL should not exceed 0x20 for each calibration. It is required to
ensure that the MCU is kept in Reset during such changes in the clock frequency
Bit 76543210
0x31 CAL6 CAL5 CAL4 CAL3 CAL2 CAL1 CAL0 OSCCAL
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 Device Specific Calibration Value
Table 6-7. Internal RC Oscillator Frequency Range
OSCCAL Value Typical Lowest Frequenc y
with Respect to Nominal Frequency Typical Highest Fre qu ency
with Respect to Nominal Frequency
0x00 50% 100%
0x3F 75% 150%
0x7F 100% 200%
28 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
6.4.2 CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register
Bit 7 – CLKPCE: Clock Prescaler Change Enable
The CLKPCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the CLKPS bits. The CLKPCE
bit is only updated when the other bits in CLKPR are simultaneously written to zero. CLKPCE is
cleared by hardware four cycles after it is written or when the CLKPS bits are written. Rewriting
the CLKPCE bit within this time-out period does neither extend the time-out period, nor clear the
CLKPCE bit.
Bits 6:4 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bits 3:0 – CLKPS[3:0]: Clock Prescaler Select Bits 3 - 0
These bits define the division factor between the selected clock source and the internal system
clock. These bits can be written run-time to vary the clock frequency to suit the application
requirements. As the divid er divides the master clock input to the MCU, the speed of all synchro-
nous peripherals is reduced when a division factor is used. The division factors are given in
Table 6-8 on page 28.
To avoid unintentional changes of clock frequency, a special write procedure must be followed
to change the CLKPS bits:
1. Write the Clock Prescaler Change Enable (CLKPCE) bit to one and all other bits in
CLKPR to zero.
2. Within four cycles, write the desired value to CLKPS while writing a zero to CLKPCE.
Interrupts must be disabled when changing presca ler setting to make sure the write procedure is
not interrupted.
The CKDIV8 Fuse determines the initial value of the CLKPS bits. If CKDIV8 is unprogrammed,
the CLKPS bits will be reset to “0000”. If CK DIV8 is programmed, CLKPS bits are reset to
“0011”, giving a division factor of eight at start up. This featu re should be used if the selected
clock source has a higher frequency than the maximum frequency of the device at the present
operating conditions. Note that any value can be written to the CLKPS bits regardless of the
CKDIV8 Fuse setting. The Application software must ensure that a sufficient division factor is
chosen if the selcted clock source has a higher frequency than the maximum frequency of the
device at the present operating conditions. The device is shipped with the CKDIV8 Fuse
programmed.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x26 CLKPCE CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 CLKPR
Read/Write R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 See Bit Description
Table 6-8. Clock Prescaler Select
CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 Clock Division Factor
0000 1
0001 2
0010 4
0011 8
29
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
0100 16
0101 32
0110 64
0111 128
1000 256
1001 Reserved
1010 Reserved
1011 Reserved
1100 Reserved
1101 Reserved
1110 Reserved
1111 Reserved
Table 6-8. Clock Prescaler Select (Continued)
CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 Clock Division Factor
30 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
7. Power Management and Sleep Modes
The high performance and industry leading code efficiency makes the AVR microcontrollers an
ideal choise for low power applications. In addition, sleep modes enable the application to shut
down unused modules in the M CU, thereby saving power. The AVR provides various sleep
modes allowing the user to tailor the power consumption to the applica tion’s requirements.
7.1 Sleep Modes Figure 6-1 on page 23 presents the different clock systems in the ATtiny13A, and their distribu-
tion. The figure is helpful in selecting an appropriate sleep mode. Table 7-1 show s the diff erent
sleep modes and their wake up sources.
Note: 1. For INT0, only level interrupt.
To enter any of the three sleep modes, the SE bit in MCUCR must be written to logic one and a
SLEEP instruction must be executed. The SM[1:0] bits in the MCUCR Register select which
sleep mode (Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, or Power-down) will be activated by the SLEEP instruc-
tion. See Table 7-2 on page 34 for a summary.
If an enabled interrupt occurs while the MCU is in a sleep mode, the MCU wakes up. The MCU
is then halted for four cycles in addition to the start-up time, executes the interrupt routine, and
resumes execution from the instruction following SLEEP. The contents of the Register File and
SRAM are unaltered when the device wakes u p fr om sleep. If a r eset occurs d uring sleep mod e,
the MCU wakes up and executes from the Reset Vector.
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down mode, the changed
level must be held for some time to wake up the MCU. Refer to “External Interrupts” on page 46
for details.
7.1.1 Idle Mode When the SM[1:0] bits are written to 00, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Idle mode,
stopping the CPU but allowing Analog Comparator, ADC, Timer/Counter, Watchdog, and the
interrupt system to continue operating. This sleep mode basically ha lts clkCPU and clkFLASH, while
allowing the other clocks to run.
Idle mode enables the MCU to wake up from external triggered inter rupts as well as internal
ones like the Timer Over flow. If wake-up from th e Analog Compa rator interrupt is not requ ired,
the Analog Com parator can be powe red down b y setting the ACD bit in the Analog Comparator
Table 7-1. Active Clock Domains and Wake-up Sources in the Different Sleep Modes
Active Clock Domains Oscillators Wake-up Sources
Sleep Mode
clkCPU
clkFLASH
clkIO
clkADC
Main Clock
Source Enabled
INT0 and
Pin Change
SPM/
EEPROM
Ready
ADC
Other I/O
Watchdog
Interrupt
Idle X X X X X X X X
ADC Noise
Reduction XXX
(1) XX X
Power-down X(1) X
31
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Control and Status Register – ACSR. This will reduce po wer consumption in Idle m ode. If the
ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered.
7.1.2 ADC Noise Reduction Mode
When the SM[1:0] bits are written to 01, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter ADC
Noise Reduction mode, stopping the CPU but allowing the ADC, the external interrupts, and the
Watchdog to continue operating (if enabled). This sleep mode h alts clkI/O, clk CPU, and clkFLASH,
while allowing the other clocks to run.
This improves the noise environment for the ADC, enabling higher resolution measurements. If
the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts a utomati cally when this mode is entered. Apart form the
ADC Conversion Complete interrupt, only an External Reset, a Watchdog Reset, a Brown-out
Reset, an SPM/EEPROM ready interrupt, an external level interrupt on INT0 or a pin change
interrupt can wake up the MCU from ADC Noise Reduction mode.
7.1.3 Power-down Mode
When the SM[1:0] bits are written to 10, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Power-
down mode. In this mode, the Oscillator is stopped, while the external interrupts, and the Watch-
dog continue oper ating (if enabled). Only an External Reset, a Watchd og Reset, a Brown-out
Reset, an external level interrupt on INT0, or a pin change interrupt can wake up the MCU. This
sleep mode halts all generated clocks, allowing op eration of asynchronous modules only.
7.2 Software BOD Disable
When the Brown-out Detector (BOD) is enabled by BODLEVEL fuses (see Table 17-3 on page
104), the BOD is actively monitoring the supply voltage during a sleep period. It is possible to
save power by disabling the BOD by software in Power-Down sleep mode. The sleep mode
power consumption will then be at the same level as when BOD is globally disabled by fuses.
If BOD is disabled by software, the BOD function is turned off immediately after entering the
sleep mode. Upon wake-up from sleep, BOD is automatically enabled again. This ensures safe
operation in case the VCC level has dropped during the sleep period.
When the BOD ha s been disabled, the wa ke-up time from sleep mode will be approximately
60µs to ensure that the BOD is working correctly before the MCU continues executing code.
BOD disable is controlled by the BODS (BOD Sleep) bit of BO D Control Re gister, see “BODCR
– Brown-Out Detector Control Register” on page 33. Writing this bit to one turns off BOD in
Power-Down and Stand-By, while writing a zero keeps the BOD active. The default setting is
zero, i.e. BOD active.
Writing to the BODS bit is controlled by a timed sequence and an enable bit, see “BODCR
Brown-Out Detector Control Register” on page 33.
7.3 Power Reduction Register
The Power Reduction Register (see “PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 34) provides a
method to reduce power consumption by stopping the clock to individual peripherals. The cur-
rent state of the peripheral is frozen and the I/O registers can not be read or written. When
stopping the clock resources used by the peripheral will remain occupied, hence the peripheral
should in most cases be disabled before stopping the clock. Waking up a module (by clearing
the bit in PRR) puts the module in the same state as before shutdown.
32 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Modules can be shut down in Idle and Active modes, significantly helping to reduce the overall
power consumption. In all other sleep modes, the clock is already stopped. See “Supply Current
of I/O Modules” on page 124 for examples.
7.4 Minimizing Power Consumption
There are several issues to consider when trying to minimize the power consumption in an AVR
controlled system. In general, sleep modes should be used as much as possible, and the sleep
mode should be selected so that as few as possi ble of the device’s functions are operating. All
functions not needed should be disabled. In particular, the following modules may need special
consideration when trying to achieve the lowest possible power consumption.
7.4.1 Analog to Digital Converter
If enabled, the ADC will be enabled in all sleep modes. To save power, the ADC should be dis-
abled before entering any sleep mode. When the ADC is turned off and on again, the next
conversion will be an extended conversion. Refer to “Analog to Digital Converter” on p age 82 for
details on ADC operation.
7.4.2 Analog Comparator
When entering Idle mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled if not used. When entering
ADC Noise Reduction mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled. In the other sleep
modes, the Analog Comparator is a utom atically disab led. H ow ever , if th e Ana log C omp arat or is
set up to use the Internal Voltage Reference as input, the Analog Comparator should be dis-
abled in all sleep modes. Otherwise, the Internal Voltage Reference will be enabled,
independent of sleep mode . Refer to “Analog Com parator ” on pag e 79 for de tails on how to co n-
figure the Analog Comparator.
7.4.3 Brown-o ut Detector
If the Brown-out Detector is not needed in the ap plication, this module should be turned off. If the
Brown-out Detector is enabled by the BODLEVEL fuses, it will be enabled in all sleep modes,
and hence, always consume power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly
to the total curren t consumpt ion. See “Brown-out Detection” on page 37 and “Software BOD Dis-
able” on page 31 for details on how to configure the Brown-out Detector.
7.4.4 Internal Voltage Reference
The Internal Voltage Reference will be enabled when needed by the Brown-out Detection, the
Analog Comparator or the ADC. If these modul es are disabled as described in the sections
above, the internal voltage reference will be disabled and it will not be consuming power. When
turned on again, the user must allow the reference to start up before the output is used. If the
reference is kept on in sleep mode, the output can be used immediately. Refer to “Internal Volt-
age Reference” on page 38 for details on the start-up time.
7.4.5 Watchdog Timer
If the Watchdog Timer is not needed in the application, this module should be turned off. If the
Watchdog Timer is enabled, it will be enabled in all sleep modes, and hence, always consume
power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to the total current consump-
tion. Refer to “Interrupts” on page 45 for details on how to configure the Watchdog Timer.
33
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
7.4.6 Port Pins When entering a sleep mode, all port pins should be configured to use minimum power. The
most important thing is then to ensure that no pins drive resistive loads. In sleep modes where
both the I/O clock (clkI/O) and the ADC clock (clkADC) are stopped, the input buffers of the device
will be disabled. This ensures that no power is consumed by the input logic when not needed. In
some cases, the input logic is needed for detecting wake-up conditions, and it will then be
enabled. Refer to the section “Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes” on page 53 for details on
which pins are enabled. If the input buffer is enab led and the inpu t sig nal is left floa ting or has an
analog signal level close to VCC/2, the input buffer will use excessive power.
For analog input pins, the digital input buffer should be disabled at all times. An analog signal
level close to VCC/2 on an input pin can cause significant current even in active mode. Digital
input buffers can be disabled by writing to the Digital Input Disable Register (DIDR0). Refer to
“DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0” on page 81 for details.
7.5 Register Description
7.5.1 BODCR – Brown-Out Detector Control Register
The BOD Control Register contains control bits for disabling the BOD by software.
Bit 1 – BODS: BOD Sleep
In order to disable BOD durin g sleep the BODS bit must be written to logic one. This is contr olled
by a timed sequence and the enable bit, BODSE. First, both BODS and BODSE must be set to
one. Second, within four clock cycles, BODS must be set to one and BODSE must be set to
zero. The BODS bit is active three clock cycles after it is set. A sleep instruction must be exe-
cuted while BODS is active in order to turn off the BOD for the actual sleep mode. The BODS bit
is automatically cleared after three clock cycles.
Bit 0 – BODSE: BOD Sleep Enable
The BODSE bit enables setting of BODS control bit, as explained on BODS bit descriptio n. BOD
disable is controlled by a timed sequence.
7.5.2 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
The MCU Control Register contains control bits for power management.
Bit 5 – SE: Sleep Enable
The SE bit must be written to logic one to make the MCU enter the sleep mode when the SLEEP
instruction is executed. To avoid the MCU entering the sle ep mode unless it is the programmer ’s
purpose, it is recommended to write the Sleep Enab le (SE) bit to o ne just before the exec ution of
the SLEEP instruction and to clear it immediately after waking up.
Bit 76543210
0x30 BODS BODSE BODCR
Read/WriteRRRRRRR/WR/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x35 PUD SE SM1 SM0 ISC01 ISC00 MCUCR
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
34 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Bits 4:3 – SM[1:0]: Sleep Mode Select Bits 1:0
These bits select between the three available sleep modes as shown in Table 7-2 on page 34.
7.5.3 PRR – Power Reduction Register
The Power Reduction Register provides a method to reduce power consumption by allowing
peripheral clock signals to be disabled.
Bits 7:2 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved and will always read as zero.
Bit 1 – PRTIM0: Power Reduction Timer/Counter0
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter0 module. When the Timer/Counter0
is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown.
Bit 0 – PRADC: Power Reduction ADC
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts do wn the ADC. The ADC mu st be disabled b efore shut down.
The analog comparator cannot be used when the ADC is shut down.
Table 7-2. Sleep Mode Select
SM1 SM0 Sleep Mode
00Idle
0 1 ADC Noise Reduction
1 0 Power-down
11Reserved
Bit 76543 210
0x25 PRTIM0 PRADC PRR
Read/Write R R R R R R R/W R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
35
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
8. System Control and Reset
8.1 Resetting the AVR
During reset, all I/O Registers are set to their initial values, and the program starts execution
from the Reset Vector. The instruction placed at the Reset Vector must be a RJMP – Relative
Jump – instruction to the reset handling routine. If the program never enables an interrupt
source, the Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these
locations. The circuit d iagram in Figure 8-1 on page 35 shows the reset logic. “System and
Reset Characteristics” on page 12 0 defines the electrical parameters of the reset circuitry.
Figure 8-1. Reset Logic
The I/O ports of the AVR are im mediately reset to their initial state wh en a reset source goes
active. This does not require any clock source to be running.
After all reset sources have gone inactive, a delay counter is invoked, stretching the internal
reset. This allows the power to reach a stable level before normal operation starts. The time-out
period of the delay counter is defined by the user through the SUT and CKSEL fuses. The differ-
ent selections for the delay period are presented in “Clock Sources” on page 24.
MCU Status
Register (MCUSR)
Brown-out
Reset Circuit
BODLEVEL[1:0]
Delay Counters
CKSEL[1:0]
CK
TIMEOUT
WDRF
BORF
EXTRF
PORF
DATA BUS
Clock
Generator
SPIKE
FILTER
Pull-up Resistor
Watchdog
Oscillator
SUT[1:0]
Power-on Reset
Circuit
36 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
8.2 Reset SourcesThe ATtiny13A has four sources of reset:
Power-on Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage is below the Power-on Reset
threshold (VPOT).
External Reset. The MCU is reset when a low level is present on the RESET pin for longer
than the minimum pulse length.
Watchdog Reset. The MCU is reset when the Watchdog Timer period expires and the
Watchdog is enabled.
Brown-out Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage VCC is below the Br own-out
Reset threshold (VBOT) and the Brown-out Detector is enabled.
8.2.1 Power-on Reset
A Power-on Reset (POR) pulse is generated by an On-chip detection circuit. The detection level
is defined in “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 120. The POR is activated whenever
VCC is below the detection level. The POR circuit can be used to trigger the Start-up Reset, as
well as to detect a failure in supply voltage.
A Power-on Reset (POR) cir cuit ensures that the device is reset from Power-on. Reac hing the
Power-on Reset threshold voltage invokes the delay counter, which determines how long the
device is kept in RESET after VCC rise. The RESET signal is activated again, without any delay,
when VCC decreases below the detection level.
Figure 8-2. MCU Start-up, RESET Tied to VCC
Figure 8-3. MCU Start-up, RESET Extended Externally
V
RESET
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
t
TOUT
V
POT
V
RST
CC
RESET
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
t
TOUT
V
POT
V
RST
VCC
37
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
8.2.2 External ResetAn External Reset is generated by a low level on the RESET pin if enabled. Reset pulses longer
than the minimum pulse width (See “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 120.) will gen-
erate a reset, even if the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a
reset. When the applied signal reaches the Reset Threshold Voltage – VRST on its positive
edge, the delay counter starts the MCU after the Time-out period – tTOUT has expired.
Figure 8-4. External Reset During Operation
8.2.3 Brown-out Detection
ATtiny13A has an On-chip Brown-out Detection (BOD) circuit for mo nitor ing the VCC level during
operation by comparing it to a fixed trigger level. The trigger level for the BOD can be selected
by the BODLEVEL fuses. The trigger level has a hysteresis to ensure spike free Brown-out
Detection. The hysteresis on the de tection level should be interpreted as VBOT+ = VBOT + VHYST/2
and VBOT- = VBOT - VHYST/2.
When the BOD is enabled, and VCC decreases to a value below the trigger level (VBOT- in Figure
8-5 on page 37), the Brown-out Reset is immediately activated. When VCC increases above the
trigger level (VBOT+ in Figure 8-5 on page 37), the delay counter starts the MCU after the Time-
out period tTOUT has expired.
The BOD circuit will only detect a drop in VCC if the voltage stays below the trigger level for lon-
ger than tBOD given in “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 120.
Figure 8-5. Brown-out Reset During Operation
VCC
RESET
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
VBOT- VBOT+
tTOUT
38 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
8.2.4 Watchdog Reset
When the Watchdog times out, it will generate a short reset pulse of one CK cycle duration. On
the falling edge of this pulse, the delay timer starts counting the Time-out period tTOUT. Refer to
“Interrupts” on pag e 45 for details on operation of the Watchdog Timer.
Figure 8-6. Watchdog Reset During Operation
8.3 Internal Voltage Reference
ATtiny13A features an internal bandgap reference. This reference is used for Brown-out Detec-
tion, and it can be used as an input to the Analog Comparator or the ADC.
8.3.1 Voltage Reference Enable Signals and Start-up Time
The voltage reference has a start-up time tha t may influence the way it should be used. The
start-up time is given in “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 120. To save power, the
reference is not always turned on. The reference is on during the following situations:
When the BOD is enabled (by programming the BODLEVEL[1:0] fuse).
When the bandgap reference is connected to the Analog Comparator (by setting the ACBG
bit in ACSR).
When the ADC is enabled.
Thus, when the BOD is not enabled, after setting the ACBG bit or enabling the ADC, the user
must always allow the reference to start up before the output from the Analog Comparator or
ADC is used. To reduce power consumption in Power-down mode, the user can avoid the three
conditions above to ensure that the reference is turned off before entering Power-down mode.
8.4 Watchdog Timer
ATtiny13A has an Enhanced Watchdog Timer (WDT). The WDT is a timer counting cycles of a
separate on-chip 128 kHz oscillator. The WDT gives an interrupt or a system reset when the
counter reaches a given time-out value. In normal opera tion m o de , it is required th at th e sys te m
uses the WDR - Watchdog Timer Reset - instruction to restart the counter before the time-out
CK
CC
39
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
value is reached. If the system doesn't restart the counter, an interrupt or system reset will be
issued.
Figure 8-7. Watchdog Timer
In Interrupt mode, the WDT gives an inter rupt when the timer expir es. This interrup t can b e used
to wake the device from sleep-modes, and also as a general system timer. One example is to
limit the maximum time allowed for certain operations, giving an interrupt when the operation
has run longer than e xpected. In System Reset mode, the WDT gives a reset when the timer
expires. This is typically used to prevent system hang-up in case of runaway code. The third
mode, Interrupt and System Reset mode, combines the other two modes by first giving an inter-
rupt and then switch to System Reset mode. This mode will for instance allow a safe shutdown
by saving critical parameters before a system reset.
The Watchdog always on (WD T ON) fuse, if programmed, w ill force the Watchdog Timer to Sys-
tem Reset mode. With the fuse program med the System Reset mode bit (WDE) and Interrupt
mode bit (WDTIE) are locked to 1 and 0 respective ly. To fu rther ensu re pro gram security, alter a-
tions to the Watchdog set-up must follow timed sequences. Th e sequence for cle aring WDE and
changing time-out configuration is as follows:
1. In the same operation, write a logic one to the Watchdog change enable bit (WDCE)
and WDE. A logic one must be written to WDE regardless of the previous value of the
WDE bit.
2. Within the next four clock cycles, write the WDE and W atchdog prescaler bits (WDP) a s
desired, but with the WDCE bit cleared. This must be done in one operation.
128kHz
OSCILLATOR
OSC/2K
OSC/4K
OSC/8K
OSC/16K
OSC/32K
OSC/64K
OSC/128K
OSC/256K
OSC/512K
OSC/1024K
WDP0
WDP1
WDP2
WDP3
WATCHDOG
RESET
WDE
WDTIF
WDTIE
MCU RESET
INTERRUPT
40 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for turning off the Watch-
dog Timer. The example assumes that interrupts are controlled (e.g. by disabling interrupts
globally) so that no interrupts will occur during the execution of these functions.
Note: See “Code Examples” on page 6.
If the Watchdog is accidentally enabled, for exa mple by a runaway pointer or brown-out condi-
tion, the device will be reset and the Watchdog Timer will stay enabled. If the code is not set up
to handle the Watchdog, th is might le ad to an e ternal loop of time-out resets. To avoid this situa-
Assembly Code Example
WDT_off:
; Turn off global interrupt
cli
; Reset Watchdog Timer
wdr
; Clear WDRF in MCUSR
in r16, MCUSR
andi r16, (0xff - (1<<WDRF))
out MCUSR, r16
; Write logical one to WDCE and WDE
; Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional time-out
in r16, WDTCR
ori r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE)
out WDTCR, r16
; Turn off WDT
ldi r16, (0<<WDE)
out WDTCR, r16
; Turn on global interrupt
sei
ret
C Code Example
void WDT_off(void)
{
__disable_interrupt();
__watchdog_reset();
/* Clear WDRF in MCUSR */
MCUSR &= ~(1<<WDRF);
/* Write logical one to WDCE and WDE */
/* Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional time-out */
WDTCR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE);
/* Turn off WDT */
WDTCR = 0x00;
__enable_interrupt();
}
41
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
tion, the application software should always clear the Watchdog System Reset Flag (WDRF)
and the WDE control bit in the initialisation routine, even if the Watchdog is not in use.
The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for changing the time-out
value of the Watchdog Timer.
Note: See “Code Examples” on page 6.
The Watchdog Timer should be reset before any change of the WDP bits, since a change in the
WDP bits can result in a time-out when switching to a shorter time-out period.
Assembly Code Example
WDT_Prescaler_Change:
; Turn off global interrupt
cli
; Reset Watchdog Timer
wdr
; Start timed sequence
in r16, WDTCR
ori r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE)
out WDTCR, r16
; -- Got four cycles to set the new values from here -
; Set new prescaler(time-out) value = 64K cycles (~0.5 s)
ldi r16, (1<<WDE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0)
out WDTCR, r16
; -- Finished setting new values, used 2 cycles -
; Turn on global interrupt
sei
ret
C Code Example
void WDT_Prescaler_Change(void)
{
__disable_interrupt();
__watchdog_reset();
/* Start timed sequence */
WDTCR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE);
/* Set new prescaler(time-out) value = 64K cycles (~0.5 s) */
WDTCR = (1<<WDE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0);
__enable_interrupt();
}
42 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
8.5 Register Description
8.5.1 MCUSR – MCU Status Register
The MCU Status Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU Reset.
Bits 7:4 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bit 3 – WDRF: Watchdog Reset Flag
This bit is set if a Watchdog Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a
logic zero to the flag.
Bit 2 – BORF: Brown-out Reset Flag
This bit is set if a Brown-out Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a
logic zero to the flag.
Bit 1 – EXTRF: External Reset Flag
This bit is set if an External Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a
logic zero to the flag.
Bit 0 – PORF: Power-on Reset Flag
This bit is set if a Power-on Reset occurs. The bit is reset only by writing a logic zero to the flag.
To make use of the Reset Flags to identify a reset condition, the user should read an d then reset
the MCUSR as ear ly as possible in the pr ogram. If the regi ster is cleared before an other reset
occurs, the source of the reset can be fo und by examining the Reset Flags.
8.5.2 WDTCR – Watchdog Timer Control Register
Bit 7 – WDTIF: Watchdog Timer Interrupt Flag
This bit is set when a time-out occurs in the Watchdog Timer and the Watchdog Timer is config-
ured for interrupt. WDTIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt
handling vector. Alternatively, WDTIF is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit
in SREG and WDTIE are set, the Watchdog Time-out Interrupt is executed.
Bit 6 – WDTIE: Watchdog T imer Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Re gister is set, the Watc hdog Inte rrupt is
enabled. If WDE is cleared in combination with this setting, the Watchdog Timer is in Interrupt
Mode, and the corr esponding interrupt is executed if time-out in the Watchdog Timer occurs.
If WDE is set, the Watchdog Timer is in Interrupt and System Reset Mode. The first time-out in
the Watchdog Timer will set WDTIF. Executing the corresponding interrupt vector will clear
WDTIE and WDTIF automatically by hardware (the Watchdog goes to System Reset Mode).
Bit 76543210
0x34 ––––WDRFBORFEXTRFPORFMCUSR
Read/WriteRRRRR/WR/WR/WR/W
Initial Value0000 See Bit Description
Bit 76543210
0x21 WDTIF WDTIE WDP3 WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 WDTCR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 0 0 X 0 0 0
43
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
This is useful for keeping the Watchdog Timer security while using the inte rrup t. To st ay in In te r-
rupt and System Reset Mode, WDTIE must be set after each interrupt. This should however not
be done within the inte rrupt se rvice routine itsel f, as this might compromi se the safety-function of
the Watchdog System Reset mode. If the interrupt is not executed before the next time-out, a
System Reset will be applied.
Note: 1. WDTON fuse set to “0“ means programmed and “1“ means unprogrammed.
Bit 4 – WDCE: Watchdog Change Enable
This bit is used in timed sequences for changing WDE and prescaler bits. To clear the WDE bit,
and/or change the prescaler bits, WDCE must be set.
Once written to one, hardware will clear WDCE after four clock cycles.
Bit 3 – WDE: Watchdog System Reset Enable
WDE is overridden by WDRF in MCUSR. This means that WDE is always set when WDRF is
set. To clear WDE, WDRF must be clear ed first. This feature ensures multiple r esets during con-
ditions causing failure, and a safe start-up after the failure.
Bit 5, 2:0 – WDP[3:0]: Watchdog Timer Prescaler 3, 2, 1 and 0
The WDP[3:0] bits determine the Watchdog Timer prescaling when the Wat chdog Timer is r un-
ning. The different prescaling values and their corresponding time-out periods are shown in
Table 8-2 on page 43.
Table 8-1. Watchdog Timer Configuration
WDTON(1) WDE WDTIE Mode Action on Time-out
1 0 0 Stopped None
1 0 1 Interrupt Mode Interrupt
1 1 0 System Reset Mode Reset
111
Interrupt and System Reset
Mode Interrupt, then go to System
Reset Mode
0 x x System Reset Mode Reset
Table 8-2. Watchdog Timer Prescale Select
WDP3 WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 Number of WDT Oscillator
Cycles Typical Time-out at
VCC = 5.0V
0000 2K (2048) cycles 16 ms
0001 4K (4096) cycles 32 ms
0010 8K (8192) cycles 64 ms
0011 16K (16384) cycles 0.125 s
0100 32K (32768) cycles 0.25 s
0101 64K (65536) cycles 0.5 s
0110 128K (131072) cycles 1.0 s
0111 256K (262144) cycles 2.0 s
1000 512K (524288) cycles 4.0 s
10011024K (1048576) cycl es 8.0 s
44 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
1010
Reserved
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Table 8-2. Watchdog Timer Prescale Select (Continued)
WDP3 WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 Number of WDT Oscillator
Cycles Typical Time-out at
VCC = 5.0V
45
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
9. Interrupts This section describes the specifics of the interrup t handling as performed in ATtiny1 3A. For a
general explanation of the AVR interrupt handling, refer to “Reset and Interrupt Handling” on
page 12.
9.1 Interrupt Vectors
The interrupt vectors of ATtiny13A are d escribed in Table 9-1 below.
If the program never e nables an inte rrupt sou rce, the Inter rupt Vector s ar e not used , and r egu lar
program code can be placed at these locations.
The most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in
ATtiny13A is:
Address Labels Code Comments
0x0000 rjmp RESET ; Reset Handler
0x0001 rjmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler
0x0002 rjmp PCINT0 ; PCINT0 Handler
0x0003 rjmp TIM0_OVF ; Timer0 Overflow Handler
0x0004 rjmp EE_RDY ; EEPROM Ready Handler
0x0005 rjmp ANA_COMP ; Analog Comparator Handler
0x0006 rjmp TIM0_COMPA ; Timer0 CompareA Handler
0x0007 rjmp TIM0_COMPB ; Timer0 CompareB Handler
0x0008 rjmp WATCHDOG ; Watchdog Interrupt Handler
0x0009 rjmp ADC ; ADC Conversion Handler
;
0x000A RESET: ldi r16, low(RAMEND); Main program start
0x000B out SPL,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x000C sei ; Enable interrupts
0x000D <instr> xxx
... ... ... ...
Table 9-1. Reset and Interrupt Vectors
Vector No. Program Address Source Interrupt Definition
1 0x0000 RESET External Pin, Power-on Reset,
Brown-out Reset, Watchdog Reset
2 0x0001 INT0 External Interrupt Request 0
3 0x0002 PCINT0 Pi n Change Interrupt Request 0
4 0x0003 TIM0_OVF Timer/Counter Overflow
5 0x0004 EE_RDY EEPROM Ready
6 0x0005 ANA_CO MP Analog Comparator
7 0x0006 TIM0_COMPA Timer/Counter Compare Match A
8 0x0007 TIM0_COMPB Timer/Counter Compare Match B
9 0x0008 WDT Watchdog Time-out
10 0x0009 ADC ADC Conversion Complete
46 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
9.2 External Interrupts
The External Interrupts are triggered by the INT0 pin or any of the PCINT[5:0] pins. Observe
that, if enabled, the interrupts will trigge r even if the INT0 or PCINT[5:0] pins are configured as
outputs. This featu re provides a way o f generating a software inte rrupt. Pin change interru pts
PCI will trigger if any enabled PCINT[5:0] pin toggles. The PCMSK Register control which pins
contribute to the pin change interrup ts. Pin change in terrupts on PCINT[5:0] ar e detected a syn-
chronously. This implies that these interrupts can be used for waking the part also from sleep
modes other than Idle mode.
The INT0 interrupts can be trigg ered by a falling or rising edge or a low level. This is set up as
indicated in the specification for the MCU Control Register – MCUCR. When the INT0 interrupt is
enabled and is configured as level triggered, the interrupt will trigger as long as the pin is held
low. Note that recognition of falling or rising edge interrupts on INT0 requires the presence of an
I/O clock, described in “Clock Systems and their Distribution” on page 23.
9.2.1 Low Level Interrupt
A low level interrupt on INT0 is detected asynchronously. This implies that this interrupt can be
used for waking the part also from sleep modes other than Idle mode. The I/O clock is halted in
all sleep modes except Idle mode.
Note that if a level trigger ed interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down, the required level
must be held long enough for the MCU to complete t he wake-up to trigger the level interrupt. If
the level disappears before the end of the Start-up Time, the MCU will still wake up, but no inter-
rupt will be generated. The start-up time is defined by the SUT and CKSEL fuses as described in
“System Clock and Clock Options” on page 23.
If the low level on the interrupt pin is removed before the device has woken up then program
execution will not be diverted to the interrupt service routine but continue from the instruction fol-
lowing the SLEEP command.
9.2.2 Pin Change Interrupt Timing
An example of timing of a pin change interrupt is shown in Figure 9-1 below.
Figure 9-1. Timing of pin change interrupts
clk
PCINT(n)
pin_lat
pin_sync
pcint_in_(n)
pcint_syn
p
cint_setflag
PCIF
PCINT(0) pin_sync pcint_syn
pin_lat
D Q
LE
pcint_setflag PC
IF
clk clk
PCINT(0) in PCMSK(x)
pcint_in_(0) 0
x
47
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
9.3 Register Description
9.3.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
The External Interrupt Control Register A contains control bits for interrupt sense control.
Bits 1:0 – ISC0[1:0]: Interrupt Sense Control 0 Bit 1 and Bit 0
The External Interrupt 0 is activated by the external pin INT0 if the SREG I-flag and the corre-
sponding interrupt mask are set. The level and edges on the external INT0 pin that activate the
interrupt are defined in Table 9-2 on page 47. The value on the INT0 pin is sampled before
detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses th at last longer than one clock
period will generate an interr upt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If
low level interrupt is selected, the low level must be held until the completion of the currently
executing instruction to generate an interrupt.
9.3.2 GIMSK – Genera l Interrupt Mask Register
Bits 7, 4:0 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bit 6 – INT0: External Interrupt Request 0 Enable
When the INT0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the exter-
nal pin interrupt is enabled. The Interrupt Sens e Control0 b its 1/0 (ISC0 1 and ISC00) in the MCU
Control Register (MCUCR) define whether the external inter rupt is activa ted on r ising and/or fall-
ing edge of the INT0 pin or level sensed. Activity on the pin will cause an interrupt request even
if INT0 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of External Interrupt Request 0 is
executed from the INT0 Interrupt Vector.
Bit 5 – PCIE: Pin Change Inter r upt Enable
When the PCIE bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), pin
change interrupt is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT[5:0] pin w ill cause an interrupt.
The corres ponding in terrup t of Pin Chang e Interr upt Request is executed from the PCI Interrupt
Vector. PCINT[5:0] pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK Register.
Bit 76543210
0x35 PUD SE SM1 SM0 ISC01 ISC00 MCUCR
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
Table 9-2. Interrupt 0 Sense Control
ISC01 ISC00 Description
0 0 The low level of INT0 generates an interrupt request.
0 1 Any logical change on INT0 generates an interrupt request.
1 0 The falling edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.
1 1 The rising edge of INT 0 generates an interrupt request.
Bit 76543210
0x3B INT0PCIE–––––GIMSK
Read/WriteRR/WR/WRRRRR
Initial Value00000000
48 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
9.3.3 GIFR – General Interrupt Flag Register
Bits 7, 4:0 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bit 6 – INTF0: External Interrupt Flag 0
When an edge or logic change on the INT0 pin trigger s an interrup t request, INT F0 become s set
(one). If the I-bit in SREG and the INT0 bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the cor-
responding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed.
Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. This flag is always cleared
when INT0 is configured as a level interrupt.
Bit 5 – PCIF: Pin Change Interrupt Flag
When a logic change on any PCINT[5:0] pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF becomes set
(one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the cor-
responding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed.
Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.
9.3.4 PCMSK – Pin Change Mask Register
Bits 7:6 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bits 5:0 – PCINT[5:0]: Pin Change Enab le Mask 5:0
Each PCINT[5:0] bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O
pin. If PCINT[5:0] is set and the PCIE bit in GIMSK is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the
corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT[5:0] is cleared, pin change interrupt on the correspondin g I/O
pin is disabled.
Bit 76543210
0x3A INTF0PCIF–––––GIFR
Read/WriteRR/WR/WRRRRR
Initial Value00000000
Bit 76543210
0x15 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 PCMSK
Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
49
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
10. I/O Ports
10.1 Overview All AVR ports have true Read-Modify-Write functionality when used as general digital I/O ports.
This means that the direction of one port pin can be changed without unintentionally changing
the direction of any other pin with the SBI and CBI instructions. The same applies when chang-
ing drive value (if configure d as output) or ena bling/disabling o f pull-up resistors ( if configur ed as
input). Each output buffer has symmetrical drive characteristics with both hig h sink and source
capability. The pin driver is strong enough to drive LED displays directly. All port pins have indi-
vidually selectable pull-up resistors with a supply-voltage invariant resistance. All I/O pins have
protection diodes to both VCC and Ground as indicated in Figure 10-1. Refer to “Electrical Char-
acteristics” on page 117 for a complete list of parameters.
Figure 10-1. I/O Pin Equivalent Schematic
All registers and bit r eferences in this section are written in general form. A lower case “x” repre-
sents the numbering letter for the p ort, and a lower case “ n” represents the bit number. Howeve r,
when using the register or bi t defines in a progr am, the precise form must be used. For example,
PORTB3 for bit no. 3 in Po rt B, her e docume nt ed ge nerally a s PORTxn . The physical I/O Regis-
ters and bit locations are listed in “Register Description” on page 57.
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for each port, one each for the Data Register
– PORTx, Data Direction Register – DDRx, and the Port Input Pins – PINx. The Port Input Pins
I/O location is read only, while the Data R eg ist er a nd th e Da ta Dir ec tion R eg iste r ar e re ad /write.
However, writing a logic one to a bit in the PINx Register, will result in a toggle in the correspond-
ing bit in the Data Register. In addition, the Pull-up Disable – PUD bit in MCUCR disables the
pull-up function for all pins in all ports when set.
Using the I/O port as G eneral Digital I/O is described in “Ports as General Digital I/O” on page
50. Most port pins are m ultiplexed with alternate func tions for the peripheral featur es on the
device. How each alternate function interferes with the port pin is described in “Alternate Port
Functions” on page 54. Refer to the individual module sectio ns for a full description of the alter-
nate functions.
Cpin
Logic
Rpu
See Figure
"General Digital I/O" for
Details
Pxn
50 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Note that enabling the alternate function of some of the port pins does not affect the use of the
other pins in the port as general digital I/O.
10.2 Ports as General Digital I/O
The ports are bi-directional I/O ports with optional internal pull-ups. Figure 10-2 on page 50
shows a functional description of one I/O-port pin, here generically called Pxn.
Figure 10-2. General Digital I/O(1)
Note: 1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O,
SLEEP, and PUD are common to all ports.
10.2.1 Configuring the Pin
Each port pin consists of three register bits: DDxn, PORTxn, and PINxn. As shown in “Register
Description” on page 57, the DDxn bits are accessed at the DDRx I/O address, the PORTxn bits
at the PORTx I/O address, and the PINxn bits at the PINx I/O address.
The DDxn bit in the DDRx Register selects the direction of this pin. If DDxn is written logic one,
Pxn is configured as an output pin. If DDxn is written logic zero, Pxn is configured as an input
pin.
clk
RPx
RRx
RDx
WDx
PUD
SYNCHRONIZER
WDx: WRITE DDRx
WRx: WRITE PORTx
RRx: READ PORTx REGISTER
RPx: READ PORTx PIN
PUD: PULLUP DISABLE
clkI/O: I/O CLOCK
RDx: READ DDRx
D
L
Q
Q
RESET
RESET
Q
Q
D
Q
QD
CLR
PORTxn
Q
QD
CLR
DDxn
PINxn
DATA BU S
SLEEP
SLEEP: SLEEP CONTROL
Pxn
I/O
WPx
0
1
WRx
WPx: WRITE PINx REGISTER
51
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an input pin, the pull-up resistor is
activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTxn has to be written logic zero or the p in has to
be configured as an output p in. The p ort pi ns are tri-stated when reset condition becomes active,
even if no clocks are ru nnin g.
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven
high (one). If PORTxn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port
pin is driven low (zero).
10.2.2 Toggling the Pin
Writing a logic one to PINxn toggles the value of PORTxn, independent on the value of DDRxn.
Note that the SBI instruction can be used to toggle one single bit in a port.
10.2.3 Switching Between Input and Output
When switching between tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) and output high ({DDxn, PORTxn}
= 0b11), an intermediate state with either pull- up enabled {DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01) or output
low ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b10) must occur. Normally, the pull-up enabled state is fully accept-
able, as a high-impedant environment will not notice the difference between a strong high driver
and a pull-up. If this is not the case, the PUD bit in the MCUCR Register can be set to disable all
pull-ups in all ports.
Switching between input with pull-up and output low generates the same problem. The user
must use either the tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) or the output high state ({DDxn, PORTxn}
= 0b10) as an intermediate step.
Table 10-1 summarizes the control signals for the pin value.
10.2.4 Reading the Pin Value
Independent of the setting of Data Direction bit DDxn, the port pin can be read through the
PINxn Register b it. As sh ow n in Figure 10-2 on page 50, the PINxn Register b i t a nd th e pr eced-
ing latch constitute a sync hronizer. This is needed to avoid metastability if the physical pin
changes value near the edge of the internal clock, but it also introduces a delay. Figure 10-3 on
page 52 shows a timing diagram of the synchroni zation when reading an externally applied pin
value. The maximum and minimum propagation delays are denoted tpd,max and tpd,min
respectively.
Table 10-1. Port Pin Con figurations
DDxn PORTxn PUD
(in MCUCR) I/O Pull-up Comment
0 0 X Input No Tri-state (Hi-Z)
0 1 0 Input Yes Pxn will source current if ext. pulled low.
0 1 1 Input No Tri-state (Hi-Z)
1 0 X Output No Output Low (Sink)
1 1 X Output No Output High (Source)
52 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 10-3. Synchronization when Reading an Externally Applied Pin value
Consider the clock period starting shortly after the first falling edge of the system clock. The latch
is closed when the clock is low, and goes transparent when the clock is high, as indicated by the
shaded region of the “SYNC LATCH” signal. The signal value is latched when the system clock
goes low. It is clocked into the PINxn Register at the succeeding positive clock edge. As in di-
cated by the two arrows tpd,max and tpd,min, a single signal transition on the pin will be delayed
between ½ and 1½ system clock period depending upon the time of assertion.
When reading back a software assigned pin value, a nop instruction must be inserted as indi-
cated in Figure 10-4 on page 52. The out instruction sets the “SYNC LATCH” signal at the
positive edge of the clock. In this case, the delay tpd through the synchronizer is one system
clock period.
Figure 10-4. Synchronization when Reading a Software Assigned Pin Value
XXX in r17, PINx
0x00 0xFF
INSTRUCTIONS
SYNC LATCH
PINxn
r17
XXX
SYSTEM CLK
t
pd, max
t
pd, min
out PORTx, r16 nop in r17, PINx
0xFF
0x00 0xFF
SYSTEM CLK
r16
INSTRUCTIONS
SYNC LATCH
PINxn
r17
tpd
53
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The following code example shows how to set port B pins 0 and 1 high, 2 and 3 low, and define
the port pins from 4 to 5 as input with a pull-up assigned to port pin 4. The resulting pin values
are read back again, but as pr eviously discussed, a nop i nstruction is in cluded to be a ble to read
back the value recently assigned to some of the pins.
Note: 1. For the assembly program, two temporary registers are used to minimize the time from pull-
ups are set on pins 0, 1 and 4, until the direction bits are correctly set, defining bit 2 and 3 as
low and redefining bits 0 and 1 as strong high drivers.
Note: See “Code Examples” on page 6.
10.2.5 Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes
As shown in Figure 10-2 on page 50, the digital input signal can be clamped to ground at the
input of the schmitt-trigger. The signal denoted SLEEP in the figure, is set by the MCU Sleep
Controller in Power-down mode, Power-save mode, and Standby mode to avoid high power
consumption if some input signals are left floati ng, or have an analo g signal level close to VCC/2.
SLEEP is overridden for port pins enabled as external interrupt pins. If the external interrupt
request is not enabled, SLEEP is active also for these pins. SLEEP is also overridden by various
other alternate functions as described in “Alternate Port Functions” on page 54.
Assembly Code Example(1)
...
; Define pull-ups and set outputs high
; Define directions for port pins
ldi r16,(1<<PB4)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0)
ldi r17,(1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0)
out PORTB,r16
out DDRB,r17
; Insert nop for synchronization
nop
; Read port pins
in r16,PINB
...
C Code Example
unsigned char i;
...
/* Define pull-ups and set outputs high */
/* Define directions for port pins */
PORTB = (1<<PB4)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0);
DDRB = (1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0);
/* Insert nop for synchronization*/
__no_operation();
/* Read port pins */
i = PINB;
...
54 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
If a logic high level (“one”) is present on an asynchronous external interrupt pin configured as
“Interrupt on Rising Edge , Falling Edge, or Any Logic Change on Pin” while the external inter rupt
is not enabled, the corresponding External Interrupt Flag will be set when resuming from the
above mentioned Sleep mode, as the clamping in these sleep mode produces the requested
logic change.
10.2.6 Unconnected Pins
If some pins are unused, it is reco mmended to ensur e that these pi ns have a defined le vel. Even
though most of the digital inputs are disabled in the deep sleep modes as described ab ove, float-
ing inputs should be avoided to reduce current consumption in all other modes where the digital
inputs are enabled (Reset, Active mode and Idle mode).
The simplest method to ensure a defined level of an unused pin, is to enable the internal pull-up.
In this case, the pull-up will be disabled during reset. If low power consumption during reset is
important, it is recommended to use an exte rnal pull-up or pull-down. Connecting unused pins
directly to VCC or GND is not recommended, since this ma y cause ex cessiv e currents if the pin is
accidentally configured as an output.
10.3 Alternate Port Functions
Most port pins have alternate functions in addition to being general digital I/Os. Figure 10-5
shows how port pin control signa ls fr om the simplified Figure 10-2 on pa ge 50 can be overridden
by alternate functions.
Figure 10-5. Alternate Port Functions
Note: WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, SLEEP,
and PUD are common to all ports. All other signals are unique for each pin.
clk
RPx
RRx
WRx
RDx
WDx
PUD
SYNCHRONIZER
WDx: WRITE DDRx
WRx: WRITE PORTx
RRx: READ PORTx REGISTER
RPx: READ PORTx PIN
PUD: PULLUP DISABLE
clkI/O: I/O CLOCK
RDx: READ DDRx
D
L
Q
Q
SET
CLR
0
1
0
1
0
1
DIxn
AIOxn
DIEOExn
PVOVxn
PVOExn
DDOVxn
DDOExn
PUOExn
PUOVxn
PUOExn: Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE ENABLE
PUOVxn: Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE VALUE
DDOExn: Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE ENABLE
DDOVxn: Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE VALUE
PVOExn: Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE ENABLE
PVOVxn: Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE VALUE
DIxn: DIGITAL INPUT PIN n ON PORTx
AIOxn: ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT PIN n ON PORTx
RESET
RESET
Q
QD
CLR
Q
QD
CLR
Q
Q
D
CLR
PINxn
PORTxn
DDxn
DATA B U S
0
1
DIEOVxn
SLEEP
DIEOExn: Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE ENABLE
DIEOVxn: Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE VALUE
SLEEP: SLEEP CONTROL
Pxn
I/O
0
1
PTOExn
PTOExn: Pxn, PORT TOGGLE OVERRIDE ENABLE
WPx: WRITE PINx
WPx
55
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The overriding signals may not be present in all port pins, but Figu re 10-5 serves as a generic
description applicable to all port pins in the AVR microcontroller family.
Table 10-2 on page 55 summarizes the function of the overriding sign als. The pin and port
indexes from Figure 10-5 on pa ge 54 are not shown in the succ eeding tables. The overriding
signals are generated internally in the modules having the alternate function.
The following subsections shortly describe the alternate functions for each port, an d relate the
overriding signals to the alternate function. Refer to the alternate function description for further
details.
10.3.1 Alternate Functions of Port B
The Port B pins with alternate function are shown in Table 10-3 on page 56.
Table 10-2. Generic Description of Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions
Signal Name Full Name Description
PUOE Pull-up
Override Enable
If this signal is set, the pull-up enable is controlled by the
PUOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the pull-up is enabled
when {DDxn, PORTxn, PUD} = 0b010.
PUOV Pull-up
Override Value
If PUOE is set, the pull-up is enabled/disabled when PUOV
is set/cleared, regardless of the setti ng of the DDxn,
PORTxn, and PUD Register bits.
DDOE Data Direction
Override Enable
If this signal is set, the Output Driver Enable is controlled by
the DDOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Output driver
is enabled by the DDxn Register bit.
DDOV Data Direction
Override Value
If DDOE is set, the Output Driver is enabled/disabled when
DDOV is set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the DDxn
Register bit.
PVOE Port Value
Override Enable
If this signal is set and the Output Driver is enabled, the port
value is controlled by the PVOV signal. If PVOE is cleared,
and the Output Driver is enabled, the port Value is
controlled by the PORTxn Register bit.
PVOV Port Value
Override Value If PVOE is se t, the port value is set to PVOV, regardless of
the setting of the PORTxn Register bit.
PTOE Port Toggle
Override Enable If PTOE is set, the PORTxn Register bit is inverted.
DIEOE Digital Input Enable
Override Enable
If this bit is set, the Digital Input Enable is controlled by the
DIEOV signal. If this signal is cleared , the Digital Input
Enable is determined by MCU state (Normal mode, sleep
mode).
DIEOV Digital Input Enable
Override Value
If DIEOE is set, the Digital Input is enabled /di sabled when
DIEOV is set/cleared, regardless of the MCU state (Normal
mode, sleep mode).
DI Digital Input
This is the Digital Input to alternate functions. In the figure,
the signal is connected to the output of the schmitt-trigger
but before the synchronizer . Unless the Digital Input is used
as a clock source, the module with the alternate function
will use its own synchronizer .
AIO Analog Input/Output This is the Analog Input/Output to/from alternate functions.
The signal is connected di rectly to the pad, and can be
used bi-directionally.
56 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Table 10-4 and Table 10-5 relate the alternate functions of Port B to the overriding signals
shown in Figure 10-5 on page 54.
Note: 1. 1 when the fuse is “0” (Programmed).
Table 10-3. Port B Pins Alternate Functions
Port Pin Alternate Function
PB5
RESET: Reset Pin
dW: debugWIRE I/O
ADC0: ADC Input Channel 0
PCINT5:Pin Change Interrupt , Source 5
PB4 ADC2: ADC Input Channel 2
PCINT4:Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 4
PB3 CLKI: External Clock Input
ADC3: ADC Input Channel 3
PCINT3:Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 3
PB2
SCK: Serial Clock Input
ADC1: ADC Input Channel 1
T0: Timer/Counter0 Clock Source.
PCINT2:Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 2
PB1
MISO: SPI Master Data Input / Slave Data Output
AIN1: Analog Comparator, Negative Input
OC0B: Timer/Counter0 Compare Match B Output
INT0: External Interrupt 0 Input
PCINT1:Pin Change Interru pt 0, Source 1
PB0
MOSI:: SPI Master Data Output / Slave Data Input
AIN0: Analog Comparator, Positive Input
OC0A: Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A output
PCINT0:Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 0
Table 10-4. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB[5:3]
Signal PB5/RESET/ADC0/PCINT5 PB4/ADC2/PCINT4 PB3/ADC3/CLKI/PCINT3
PUOE RSTDISBL(1) • DWEN(1) 00
PUOV100
DDOE RSTDISBL(1) • DWEN(1) 00
DDOV debugWire T ransmit 0 0
PVOE 0 0 0
PVOV 0 0 0
PTOE000
DIEOE RSTDISBL(1) + (PCINT5 •
PCIE + ADC0D) PCINT4 • PCIE + ADC2D PCINT3 • PCIE + ADC3D
DIEOV ADC0D ADC2D ADC3D
DI PCINT5 Input PCINT4 Input PCINT3 Input
AIO RESET Input, ADC0 Input ADC2 Input ADC3 Input
57
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
10.4 Register Description
10.4.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
Bits 7, 2 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bit 6 – PUD: Pull-up Disable
When this bit is written to one, the pull-ups in the I/O ports are disabled even if the DDxn and
PORTxn Registers are configured to enable the pull-ups ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01). See “Con-
figuring the Pin” on page 50 for more details about this feature.
10.4.2 PORTB – Port B Data Register
10.4.3 DDRB – Port B Data Direction Register
Table 10-5. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB[2:0]
Signal
Name PB2/SCK/ADC1/
T0/PCINT2 PB1/MISO/AIN1/
OC0B/INT0/PCINT1 PB0/MOSI/AIN0/
AREF/OC0A/PCINT0
PUOE000
PUOV000
DDOE 0 0 0
DDOV 0 0 0
PVOE 0 OC0B Enable OC0A Enable
PVOV 0 OC0B OC0A
PTOE000
DIEOE PCINT2 • PCIE + ADC1D PCINT1 • PCIE + AIN1D PCINT0 • PCIE + AIN0D
DIEOV ADC1D AIN1D AIN0D
DI T 0/PCINT2 Input INT0/PCINT1 Input PCINT0 Input
AIO ADC1 Input Analog Comparator
Negative Input Analog Co mparator Positive
Input
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x35 PUD SE SM1 SM0 ISC01 ISC00 MCUCR
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x18 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 PORTB
Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x17 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 DDRB
Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
58 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
10.4.4 PINB – Port B Input Pins Address
Bit 76543210
0x16 PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 PINB
Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
59
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
11. 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM
11.1 Features Two Independent Output Compare Units
Double Buffered Output Comp are Registers
Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload)
Glitch Free, Phase Correc t Pulse Width Modu lator (PWM)
Variable PWM Period
Frequency Genera tor
Three Independent Interrupt Sources (TOV0, OCF0A, and OCF0B)
11.2 Overview Timer/Counter0 is a general purpose 8-bit Timer/Counter module, with two independent Output
Compare Units, and with PWM support. It allows accurate progr am execution timing (event ma n-
agement) and wave generation.
A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 11-1 on page 59. For
the actual placement of I/O pins, refer to “Pinout of ATtiny13A” on page 2. CPU accessible I/O
Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register
and bit locations are listed in the Register Description” on page 70.
Figure 11-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram
Clock Select
Timer/Counter
DATA BUS
OCRnA
OCRnB
=
=
TCNTn
Waveform
Generation
Waveform
Generation
OCnA
OCnB
=
Fixed
TOP
Value
Control Logic
= 0
TOP BOTTOM
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
OCnA
(Int.Req.)
OCnB
(Int.Req.)
TCCRnA TCCRnB
Tn
Edge
Detector
( From Prescaler )
clkTn
60 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
11.2.1 Registers The Timer/Counter (TCNT0) an d Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and O CR0B) are 8-bit
registers. Interrupt request (abbreviated to Int.Req . in the figure) signals are all visible in the
Timer Interrupt Flag Register (T IFR0). All interrupts are individ ually masked with the Timer Inte r-
rupt Mask Register (TIMSK0). TIFR0 and TIMSK0 are not shown in the figure.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via th e prescaler, or b y an external clo ck source on
the T0 pin. The Clock Select logic block contro ls which clock source and edge the Tim er/Counter
uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source
is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clkT0).
The double buffered Output Com pare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) is compared with the
Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Gen-
erator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pins (OC0A and
OC0B). See “Output Compare Unit” on page 61. for details. The Compare Match event will also
set the Compare Flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) which can be used to generate a n Output Compare
interrupt request.
11.2.2 Definitions Many register and bit refer ences in this section are written in general for m. A lower case “n
replaces the Timer/Counter num ber, in this case 0. A lower case “x” replaces the Output Com-
pare Unit, in this case Compare Unit A or Compare Unit B. However, when using the register or
bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT0 for accessing
Timer/Counter0 counter value and so on.
The definitions in Table 11-1 on page 60 are also used extensively throughout the document.
11.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source
is selected by the Clock Select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select (CS0[2:0]) bits
located in the Timer /Counter Control Reg ister (TCCR0B) . For details o n clock sources and p res-
caler, see “Timer/Counter Prescaler ” on page 77.
11.4 Counter Unit The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure
11-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surroundings.
Table 11-1. Definitions
BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x00.
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255).
TOP T he counter reaches the TOP whe n it becomes equal to the highest value in th e
count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF
(MAX) or the value stored in the OCR0A Register. The assignment is depen-
dent on the mode of operation.
61
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 11-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram
Signal description (internal signals):
count Increment or de cre m en t TC NT 0 by 1.
direction Select between increment and decrement.
clear Clear TCNT0 (set all bits to zero).
clkTnTimer/Counter clock, re fe rr ed to as clk T0 in the following.
top Signalize that TCNT0 has reached maximum value.
bottom Signalize that TCNT0 has reached minimum value (zero).
Depending of the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented
at each timer clock (clkT0). clkT0 can be generated from an external or inte rnal clock source,
selected by the Clock Select bits (CS0[2:0]). When no clock source is selected (CS0[2:0] = 0)
the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT0 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of
whether clkT0 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has prio rity over) all counter clear or
count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM01 and WGM00 bits located in
the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0A) and the WGM02 bit located in the Timer/Counter
Control Register B (TCCR0B). There are close connections between how the counter behaves
(counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare output OC0A. For more
details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of Opera-
tion” on page 64.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set according to the m ode of operation se lected by
the WGM0[1:0] bits. TOV0 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
11.5 Output Compare Unit
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT0 with the Output Compare Registers
(OCR0A and OCR0B). Whenever TCNT0 equals OCR0A or OCR0B, the compara tor signals a
match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) at the next timer clock
cycle. If the corresponding inte rrupt is enabled, the Output Compare Flag generates an Output
Compare interrupt. Th e Outp ut Co mpa re Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is exe-
cuted. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by software b y w riting a logical one to its I/O bit
location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to
operating mode set by the WGM0[2:0] bits and C ompare Output mode (COM0x[1:0]) bits. The
max and bottom signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special cases of
the extreme values in some modes of operation (See “Modes of Operation” on page 64.).
Figure 11-3 on page 62 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit.
DATA BUS
TCNTn Control Logic
count
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
Clock Select
top
Tn
Edge
Detector
( From Prescaler )
clk
Tn
bottom
direction
clear
62 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 11-3. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram
The OCR0x Registers are double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation
(PWM) modes. For the normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) mo des of oper ation, the dou-
ble buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR0x Compare
Registers to either top or bottom of the coun ting sequence. The synchronization prevents the
occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pu lse s, th er eb y ma kin g th e ou tp ut glitch -f re e.
The OCR0x Register access may seem comple x, but this is not case. When the double bu ffering
is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR0x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is dis-
abled the CPU will access the OCR0x directly.
11.5.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by
writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC0x) bit. Forcing Compare Match will not set the
OCF0x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC0x pin will be updated as if a real Compare
Match had occurred ( the COM0x[1:0] bi ts se tting s defin e wh ethe r the OC0x pi n is set, clear ed or
toggled).
11.5.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT0 Write
All CPU write operations to the TCNT0 Register will block any Compare Match that occur in the
next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR0x to be initial-
ized to the same value as TCNT0 witho ut trigge ring an in terrupt whe n the Timer/Counte r clock is
enabled.
11.5.3 Using the Output Compare Unit
Since writing TCNT0 in any mode of operation will block all Compare Matches for one timer
clock cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT0 when using the Output Compare
Unit, independently of whether the Time r/Counter is ru nning or not. If the va lue written to TCNT0
equals the OCR0x value, the Compare Match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform
OCFnx (Int.Req.)
= (8-bit Comparator )
OCRnx
OCnx
DATA BUS
TCNTn
WGMn1:0
Waveform Generator
top
FOCn
COMnX1:0
bottom
63
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT0 value equal to BOTTOM when the count er is
down-counting.
The setup of the OC0x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the
port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC0x value is to use the Force Output Com-
pare (FOC0x) strobe bits in Normal mode. The OC0x Registers keep their values e ven when
changing between Waveform Generation modes.
Be aware that the COM0x[1:0] bits are not double buffered together with the compare value.
Changing the COM0x[1:0] bits will take effect immediately.
11.6 Compare Match Output Unit
The Compare Output mode (COM0x[1:0]) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator
uses the COM0x[1:0] bits for defining the Output Compare (OC0x) state at the next Compare
Match. Also, the COM0x[1:0] bits control the OC0x pin output source. Figure 11-4 on page 63
shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COM0x[1:0] bit setting. The I/O Regis-
ters, I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the p arts of th e gener al I/O Port
Control Registers (DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM0x[1:0] bits are shown. When
referring to th e OC0x state, the re ference is for the internal OC0x Register, not the OC0x pin. If
a system reset occur, the OC0x Register is reset to “0”.
Figure 11-4. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC0x) from the Waveform
Generator if eith er of the COM0x[1:0 ] bits are set. However , the OC0x pin direction (inpu t or ou t-
put) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction
Register bit for the OC0x pin (DDR_OC0x) must be set as output before the OC0x value is visi-
ble on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform Generation mode.
PORT
DDR
DQ
DQ
OCn
Pin
OCnx
DQ
Waveform
Generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA B U S
FOCn
clkI/O
64 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The design of the Output Compare pin log ic allows initialization of the OC0x state before the out-
put is enabled. Note that some COM0x[1:0] bit settings are reserved for certain modes of
operation. See “Register Description” on page 70.
11.6.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation
The Waveform Generator uses the COM0x[1:0] bits differently in Normal, CTC, and PWM
modes. For all modes, setting the COM0x[1:0] = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action
on the OC0x Register is to be performed on the next Compare Match. For compare output
actions in the no n-PWM modes refer to Tab le 11-2 on page 70. For fast PWM mode, refer to
Table 11-3 on page 71 , and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 11-4 on page 71.
A change of the COM0x[1:0] bits state will have effect at the first Compare Match after the bits
are written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to ha ve immediate effect by using
the FOC0x strobe bits.
11.7 Modes of Operation
The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is
defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM0[2:0]) and Compare Out-
put mode (COM0x[1:0]) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting
sequence, while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM0x[1:0] bits control whether
the PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-
PWM modes the COM0x[1:0] bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled
at a Compare Match (See “Compare Match Output Unit” on page 63.).
For detailed timing information refer to Figure 11-8 on page 69, Figure 11-9 on page 69, Figure
11-10 on page 69 and Figure 11-11 on page 70 in “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page
68.
11.7.1 Normal Mode The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM0[2:0] = 0). In this mode the counting
direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply
overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bot-
tom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) will be set in the same
timer clock cycle as the TCNT0 becomes zero. The TOV0 Flag in this case behaves like a ninth
bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. Ho wever, combined with the timer overflow interrupt
that automatically clears the TOV0 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software.
There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written
anytime.
The Output Compa re Unit can be used to gene rate interrup ts at some given time. Using the Ou t-
put Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will
occupy too much of the CPU time.
11.7.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode
In Clear Time r on Compare or CTC mode (WGM0[2:0] = 2), the OCR0A Register is used to
manipulate the counter resolution . In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter
value (TCNT0) matches the OCR0A. The OCR0A de fines the top value for the counter, hence
also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the Compare Match output frequency. It
also simplifies the op e ra tio n of coun tin g exte rn al ev en ts.
65
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 11-5 on page 65. The counter value
(TCNT0) increases until a Compare Match occurs between TCNT0 and OCR0A, and then coun-
ter (TCNT0) is clea re d.
Figure 11-5. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram
An interrupt ca n be gener ated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the
OCF0A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating
the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is run-
ning with none or a low pres caler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not
have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR0A is lower than the current
value of TCNT0, the counter will miss the Compare Match. The counter will then have to count to
its maximum valu e (0xFF) and wrap around s tarting at 0x00 before the Comp are Match can
occur.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC0A output can be set to togg le its logica l
level on each Compare Match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode
(COM0A[1:0] = 1). The O C0A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the da ta direction
for the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0 =
fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following
equation:
The N variabl e represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of op eration, the TOV0 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the
counter counts from MAX to 0x00.
11.7.3 Fast PWM Mode
The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM0[2 :0] = 3 or 7) provides a high fre-
quency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by
its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOT-
TOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM0[2:0] = 3, and OCR0A when WGM0[2:0] = 7. In non-
inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the Compare Match
between TCNT0 and OCR0x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode, the out-
put is set on Compare Match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the
operating fr equency of the fast PWM mode c an be twice as high as the phase corr ect PWM
mode that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited
TCNTn
OCn
(Toggle)
OC nx Interrupt Flag S et
1 4
Period
2 3
( CO Mnx [1 : 0 ] = 1)
fOCnx fclk_I/O
2 N 1 OCRnx+()⋅⋅
--------------------------------------------------=
66 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows phy sically small
sized external components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost.
In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value.
The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast
PWM mode is shown in Figure 11-6 on page 66. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram
shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. T he diagram includes non-
inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes repr e-
sent Compare Matches between OCR0x and TCNT0.
Figure 11-6. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
The Timer/Coun ter Over flo w Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the inter-
rupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value.
In fast PWM mode, the compare un it allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins.
Setting the COM0x[1:0] bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM out-
put can be generated by setting the COM0x[1 :0] to three: Setting the COM0A[1:0] bits to one
allows the AC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is not
available for the OC0B pin (Se e Ta ble 1 1- 3 on page 7 1). The actual OC0x value will only be vis-
ible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is
generated by setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at the Compare Match between OCR0x
and TCNT0, and clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at the timer clock cycle the counter is
cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variabl e represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values fo r the OCR0A Re gister rep resents special case s when gen erating a PW M
waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will
be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR0A equal to MAX will result
T
CNTn
OC R nx Update and
TOVn Int errupt Flag S et
1
P
eriod 2 3
O
Cn
O
Cn
( CO Mnx [1 : 0 ] = 2)
( CO Mnx [1 : 0 ] = 3)
OC R nx Interrupt Flag S et
4 5 6 7
fOCnxPWM fclk_I/O
N 256
------------------=
67
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
in a constantly high or low output (dep ending on the polarity of the ou tput set by the COM0A[1:0]
bits.)
A frequency (with 50 % duty cycle) wavefo rm output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by set-
ting OC0x to toggle its logical level on each Compare M atch (COM0x[1:0] = 1). The waveform
generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero. This
feature is similar to the OC0A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Out-
put Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
11.7.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM0[2:0] = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct
PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope
operation. The coun ter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to TOP and then from TOP to BOT-
TOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM0[2:0] = 1, and OCR0A when WGM0[2:0] = 5. In non-
inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the Compare Match
between TCNT0 and OCR0x while upcounting, and set on the Compare Match while down-
counting. In inverting Ou tput Compar e mode, the oper ation is inve rted. The dual- slope o peration
has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the sym-
metric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control
applications.
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is increm ented until the counter valu e matches TOP.
When the counter reaches TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT0 value will be equal
to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram fo r th e pha se correct PWM mode is shown
on Figure 11-7 on page 67. The TC NT0 value is in the tim in g dia gr am s ho w n as a h istogram for
illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM out-
puts. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent Compare Matches
between OCR0x and TCNT0.
Figure 11-7. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Tim in g Diagr am
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 2 3
TCNTn
Period
OCn
OCn
(COMnx[1:0] = 2)
(COMnx[1:0] = 3)
OCRnx Update
68 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The Timer/Counter Overflo w Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reache s BOTTOM. The
Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM
value.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the
OC0x pins. Setting the COM0x[1:0] bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted
PWM output can be generated by setting the COM0x[1:0] to three: Setting the COM0A0 bits to
one allows the OC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is
not available for the OC0B pin (See Table 11-4 on page 71). The actual OC0x value will only be
visible on the port pin if the data direction fo r the port pin is se t as output. The PWM waveform is
generated by clea ring (or setting) the OC0x Register at the Compare Mat ch between OCR0x
and TCNT0 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at Com-
pare Match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when th e counter decrem ents. The PWM frequency for
the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represent special cases wh en generating a PWM
waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OC R0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the
output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for
non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values.
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 11-7 on page 67 OCn has a transition from high to low
even though there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to guarantee symmetry
around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition without Compare Match.
OCR0A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 11-7 on page 67. When the OCR0A value
is MAX the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-counting Compare Match. To
ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at MAX must correspond to the result of
an up-counting Compare Match.
The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR0A, and for that reason
misses the Compare Match and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the
way up.
11.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkT0) is therefore shown as a
clock enable sign al in the following figures. Th e figures include information on whe n Interrupt
Flags are s et. Figure 11-8 on page 69 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation.
The figure shows the count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase cor-
rect PWM mode.
fOCnxPCPWM fclk_I/O
N510
------------------=
69
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 11-8. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling
Figure 11-9 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 11-9. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
Figure 11-10 shows the setting of OCF0B in all modes and OCF0A in all modes except CTC
mode and PWM mode, where OCR0A is TOP.
Figure 11-10 . Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF0x, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
TOVn
clkI/O
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
TOVn
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clk
I/O
/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx Value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clk
I/O
clk
Tn
(clk
I/O
/8)
70 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 11-11 shows the setting of OCF0 A and the clearing of TCNT0 in CTC mode and fast
PWM mode where OCR0A is TOP.
Figure 11-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Time r on Compa re Match mode, with Pres-
caler (fclk_I/O/8)
11.9 Register Description
11.9.1 TCCR 0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A
Bits 7:6 – COM0A[1:0]: Compare Match Output A Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0A) behavior. If one or both of the COM0A[1:0]
bits are set, the OC0A output overrides the normal port function ality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC0A pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC0A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0A[1:0] bits depends on the
WGM0[2:0] bit setting.
Table 11-2 shows the COM0A[1:0] bit functionality when the WGM0[2:0] bits are set to a normal
or CTC mode (non-PWM).
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
(CTC)
TOP
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clk
I/O
clk
Tn
(clk
I/O
/8)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3210
0x2F COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0 WGM01 WGM00 TCCR0A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 11-2. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM0A1 COM0A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
0 1 Toggle OC0A on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC0A on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC0A on Compare Match
71
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Table 11-3 shows the COM0A[1:0] bit functionality when the WGM0[1:0] bits are set to fast
PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the Com-
pare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM Mode” on page 65
for more details.
Table 11-4 shows the COM0A[1:0] bit functionality when the WGM0[2:0] bits are set to phase
correct PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the Com-
pare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on
page 67 for more details.
Bits 5:4 – COM0B[1:0]: Compare Match Output B Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0B) behavior. If one or both of the COM0B[1:0]
bits are set, the OC0B output overrides the normal port function ality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC0B pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC0B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0B[1:0] bits depends on the
WGM0[2:0] bit setting.
Table 11-5 on page 72 shows the COM0B[1:0] bit functionality when the WGM0[2:0] bits are set
to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM ).
Table 11-3. Compare Output Mode, Fa st PWM Mode(1)
COM0A1 COM0A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disco nnected.
01
WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Op eration, OC0A Disconnected.
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on Compare Match.
1 0 Clear OC0A on Compare Match, set OC0A at TOP
1 1 Set OC0A on Compare Match, clear OC0A at TOP
Table 11-4. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM0A1 COM0A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected .
01
WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Op eration, OC0A Disconnected.
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on Compare Match.
10
Clear OC0A on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC0A on
Compare Match when down-counting.
11
Set OC0A on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC0A on
Compare Match when down-counting.
72 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Table 11-6 shows the COM0B[1:0] bit functionality when the WGM0[2:0] bits are set to fast
PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the Com-
pare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM Mode” on page 65
for more details.
Table 11-7 shows the COM0B[1:0] bit functionality when the WGM0[2:0] bits are set to phase
correct PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the Com-
pare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on
page 67 for more details.
Bits 3:2 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Table 11-5. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM0B1 COM0B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.
0 1 Toggle OC0B on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC0B on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC0B on Compare Match
Table 11-6. Compare Output Mode, Fa st PWM Mode(1)
COM0B1 COM0B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disco nnected.
01Reserved
1 0 Clear OC0B on Compare Match, set OC0B at TOP
1 1 Set OC0B on Compare Match, clear OC0B at TOP
Table 11-7. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM0B1 COM0B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected .
01Reserved
10
Clear OC0B on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC0B on
Compare Match when down-counting.
11
Set OC0B on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC0B on
Compare Match when down-counting.
73
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Bits 1:0 – WGM0[1:0]: Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM02 bit found in the TCCR0B Register, these bits control the counting
sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of wave-
form generation to be used, see Table 11-8 on page 73. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode,
and two types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode s (see “Modes of Oper ation” on page 64).
Notes: 1. MAX = 0xFF
2. BOTTOM = 0x00
11.9.2 TCCR 0B – Timer/Counter Control Register B
Bit 7 – FOC0A: Force Output Compare A
The FOC0A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR0B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0A bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0A output is
changed accord ing to it s COM0A[1: 0] bits se tting. Note that th e FOC0A bit is implem ented as a
strobe. Th erefor e it is the value presen t in the CO M0A[1: 0] bits that de termines th e effec t of the
forced compare.
A FOC0A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR0A as TOP.
The FOC0A bit is always read a s zero.
Table 11-8. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description
Mode WGM02 WGM01 WGM00 Timer/Counter
Mode of Operation TOP Update of
OCRx at TOV Flag
Set on(1)(2)
0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX
1001
PWM
(Phase Correct) 0xFF TOP BOTTOM
2010CTC OCRAImmediateMAX
3 0 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF TOP MAX
4100Reserved
5101
PWM
(Phase Correct) OCRA TOP BOTTOM
6110Reserved
7111Fast PWM OCRATOP TOP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3210
0x33 FOC0A FOC0B WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00 TCCR0B
Read/Write W W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
74 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Bit 6 – FOC0B: Force Output Compare B
The FOC0B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR0B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0B bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0B output is
changed accord ing to it s COM0B[1: 0] bits se tting. Note that th e FOC0B bit is implem ented as a
strobe. Th erefor e it is the value presen t in the CO M0B[1: 0] bits that de termines th e effec t of the
forced compare.
A FOC0B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR0B as TOP.
The FOC0B bit is always read a s zero.
Bits 5:4 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bit 3 – WGM02: Waveform Generation Mode
See the descript ion in the “TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A” on page 70.
Bits 2:0 – CS0[2:0]: Clock Select
The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter.
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the
counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the
counting.
11.9.3 TCNT0 – Timer/Counter Regi st er
The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the
Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT0 Register blocks (removes) the Compare
Match on th e following time r clock. M odifying the counter (TCNT0) while the counter is running,
introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match between TCNT0 and the OCR0x Registers.
Table 11-9. Clock Select Bit Description
CS02 CS01 CS00 Description
0 0 0 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)
001clk
I/O/(No prescaling)
010clk
I/O/8 (From prescaler)
011clk
I/O/64 (From prescaler)
100clk
I/O/256 (From prescaler)
101clk
I/O/1024 (From prescaler)
1 1 0 External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on falling edge.
1 1 1 External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on rising edge.
Bit 76543210
0x32 TCNT0[7:0] TCNT0
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
75
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
11.9.4 OCR0A – Output Compare Register A
The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT0 ). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC0A pin.
11.9.5 OCR0B – Output Compare Register B
The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT0 ). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC0B pin.
11.9.6 TIMSK0 – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register
Bits 7:4, 0 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bit 3 – OCIE0B: Timer/Counter Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE0B bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
Timer/Counter Compare Match B interrup t is enab led. The correspondin g interrupt is executed if
a Compare Match in Timer/Counter occurs, i.e., when the OCF0B bit is set in the Timer/Counter
Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0.
Bit 2 – OCIE0A: Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE0A bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
Timer/Coun te r0 Compare M a tch A in te rr up t is en ab le d. T h e co rr esponding int er ru p t is e xe cu te d
if a Compare Match in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the OCF0A bit is set in the
Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0.
Bit 1 – TOIE0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE0 bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an
overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the TOV0 bit is set in the Timer/Counter 0 Inter-
rupt Flag Register – TIFR0.
Bit 76543210
0x36 OCR0A[7:0] OCR0A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
Bit 76543210
0x29 OCR0B[7:0] OCR0B
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
Bit 76543210
0x39 ––––OCIE0BOCIE0ATOIE0TIMSK0
Read/WriteRRRRR/WR/WR/WR
Initial Value00000000
76 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
11.9.7 TIFR0 – Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register
Bits 7:4, 0 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bit 3 – OCF0B: Output Compare Flag 0 B
The OCF0B bit is set when a Compare Ma tch occurs be tween the Timer/Counte r and the data in
OCR0B – Output Compare Register 0 B. OCF0B is cleared by hardwa re whe n executing the co r-
responding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0B is cleare d by writing a logic one to
the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0B (Timer/Counter Compare B Match Interrupt Enable),
and OCF0B are set, the Timer/Counter Compare Match Interrupt is executed.
Bit 2 – OCF0A: Output Compare Flag 0 A
The OCF0A bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter0 and the data
in OCR0A – Output Compare Register0. OCF0A is cleared by hardware whe n executing the cor-
responding interrupt handling vector. Alternativel y, OCF0A is cleared by writing a logic on e to
the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0A (Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Interrupt Enable),
and OCF0A are set, the Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Interrupt is executed.
Bit 1 – TOV0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag
The bit TOV0 is set when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared by hardware
when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV0 is cleared by
writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE0 (Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt
Enable), and TOV0 are set, the Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is executed.
The setting of this flag is depend ent of the WGM0[2:0] bit setting. Refer to Table 11-8, “Wave-
form Generation Mode Bit Descr iption” on page 73.
Bit 76543210
0x38 OCF0B OCF0A TOV0 –TIFR0
Read/Write R R R R R/W R/W R/W R
Initial Value00000000
77
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
12. Timer/Counter Prescaler
12.1 Overview The Timer/Counter can be clocked directly by the system clock (by setting the CSn[2:0] = 1).
This provides the fastest operation, with a maximum Timer/Counter clock frequency equal to
system clock frequency (fCLK_I/O). Alternatively, one of four taps from the prescaler can be used
as a clock source. The prescaled clock has a frequency of either fCLK_I/O/8, fCLK_I/O/64,
fCLK_I/O/256, or fCLK_I/O/1024.
12.2 Prescaler Reset
The prescaler is free running, i.e., operates independently of the Clock Select logic of the
Timer/Counter. Since the prescaler is not affected by the Timer/Counter’s clock select, the stat e
of the prescaler will have implications for situations where a prescaled clock is used. One exam-
ple of prescaling artifa cts occurs when the timer is ena bled and clocked by the prescale r (6 >
CSn[2:0] > 1). The number of system clock cycles from when the timer is enabled to the first
count occurs can be from 1 to N+1 system clock cycles, where N equa ls the prescaler divisor (8,
64, 256, or 1024).
It is possible to use the Prescaler Reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program
execution.
12.3 External Clock Source
An external clock source applied to the T0 pin can be used as Timer/Counter clock (clkT0). The
T0 pin is sampled once every system clock cycle by the pin synchronization logic. The synchro-
nized (sampled) signal is then p assed through the edge dete ctor. Figure 12- 1 on pa ge 77 shows
a functional equivalent block diagram of the T0 synchronization and edge detector logic. The
registers are clocked at the positive edge of the internal system clock (clkI/O). The latch is trans-
parent in the high period of the internal system clock.
The edge detector generates one clkT0 pulse for each positive (CSn[2:0] = 7) or negative
(CSn[2:0] = 6) edge it detects.
Figure 12-1. T0 Pin Sampling
The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system clock cycles
from an edge has been applied to the T0 pi n to the counter is updated.
Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when T0 has been stable for at least one
system clock cycle, otherwise it is a risk that a false Timer/Counter clock pulse is generated.
Each half period of the external clock applied must be longer than one system clock cycle to
ensure correct sampling. The external clock must be guaranteed to have less than half the sys-
tem clock frequency (fExtClk < fclk_I/O/2) give n a 50/50% duty cycle. Since th e edge detector use s
Tn_sync
(To Clock
Select Logic)
Edge DetectorSynchronization
DQDQ
LE
DQ
Tn
clk
I/O
78 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
sampling, the maximum frequency of an external clock it can detect is half the sampling fre-
quency (Nyquist sampling theorem). However, du e to variation of the system clock frequency
and duty cycle caused by Oscillator source (crystal, resonator, and capacitors) tolerances, it is
recommended that maximu m frequency of an external clock source is less than fclk_I/O/2.5.
An external clock source can not be pre sca le d.
Figure 12-2. Prescaler for Timer/Counter0
Note: 1. The synchronization logic on the input pins (T0) is shown in Figure 12-1 on page 77.
12.4 Register Description.
12.4.1 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register
Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. In this mode, the
value that is written to the PSR10 bit is kept, hence keeping the Prescaler Reset signal asserted.
This ensure s that the Timer/ Counte r is halte d and can be configured without the risk of advanc-
ing during configuration. When the TSM bit is written to zero, the PSR10 bit is cleared by
hardware, and the Timer/Counter start counting.
Bit 0 – PSR10: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter0
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter0 prescaler will be Reset. This bit is normally cleared
immediately by hardware, except if the TSM bit is set.
PSR10
Clear
clkT0
T0
clkI/O
Synchronization
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x28 TSM PSR10 GTCCR
Read/Write R/W R R R R R R R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
79
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
13. Analog Comparator
The Analog Comparator compares the input values on the positive pin AIN0 and negative pin
AIN1. When the voltage on the positive pin AIN0 is hig her than the voltage on the negative pin
AIN1, the Analog Comparator output, ACO, is set. The comparator can trigger a separate inter-
rupt, exclusive to the Anal og Comparator. T he user can se lect Interrupt trigger ing on comparator
output rise, fall or toggle. A block diagram of the comparator and its surrounding logic is shown
in Figure 13-1 on page 79.
Figure 13-1. Analog Comparator Block Diagram
See Figure 1-1 o n p age 2 , Ta ble 10- 5 o n p age 57, and Table 13-2 on page 81 for Analog Compar-
ator pin placement.
13.1 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input
It is possible to select any of the ADC[3:0] pins to replace the negative input to the Analog Com-
parator. The ADC multiplexer is used to select this input, and consequently, the ADC must be
switched off to utilize this feature. If the Analog Comparator Mu ltiplexer Enable bit (ACME in
ADCSRB) is set and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), MUX[1:0] in ADMUX
select the input pin to replace the negative input to the Analog Comparator, as shown in Table
13-1. If ACME is cleared or ADEN is set, AIN1 is applied to the negative input to the Analog
Comparator.
ACBG
BANDGAP
REFERENCE
ADC MULTIPLEXER
OUTPUT
ACME
ADEN
(1)
Table 13-1. Ana log Comparator Multiplexed Input
ACME ADEN MUX[1:0] Analog Comparator Negative Input
0x xxAIN1
11 xxAIN1
1 0 00 ADC0
1 0 01 ADC1
1 0 10 ADC2
1 0 11 ADC3
80 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
13.2 Register Description
13.2.1 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register
Bit 6 – ACME: Analog Co mparator Multiplexer Enable
When this bit is written logic one and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), the
ADC multiplexer selects the negative input to the Analog Comparator. When this bit is written
logic zero, AIN1 is applied to the negative input of the Analog Comparator. For a detailed
description of this bit, see “Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input” on page 79.
13.2.2 ACSR– Analog Comparator Control and Status Regist er
Bit 7 – ACD: Analog Comparator Disable
When this bit is writ ten logic one, the power to the Analog Compar ator is switched off. T his bit
can be set at any time to turn off the Analog Comparator. This will reduce power consumption in
Active and Idle mode. When changing the ACD bit, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be
disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bit is
changed.
Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Selec t
When this bit is set, a fixed bandgap reference voltage replaces the positive input to the Analog
Comparator. When this b it is clea red, AIN0 is applied to the positive input of the Analog Compar-
ator. When the bandgap reference is used as input to the Analog Comparator, it will take certain
time for the voltage to stabilize. If not stabilized, the first value may give a wrong value.
Bit 5 – ACO: Analog Comparator Output
The output of the Analog Comparator is synchronized and then directly connected to ACO. The
synchronization introduces a delay of 1 - 2 clock cycles.
Bit 4 – ACI: Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag
This bit is set by hardware when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode defined
by ACIS1 and ACIS0. The Analog Comparator interrupt routine is exec uted if the ACI E bit is se t
and the I-bit in SREG is set. ACI is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding inter-
rupt handling vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag.
Bit 3 – ACIE: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable
When the ACIE bit is written logi c one and the I-bi t in the Status Register is set, the Analog Com-
parator interrupt is activated. When written logic zero, the interrupt is disabled.
Bit 2 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bit 76543210
0x03 ACME ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 ADCSRB
Read/Write R R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
Bit 76543210
0x08 ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIS1 ACIS0 ACSR
Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R R/W R/W
Initial Value00N/A00000
81
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Bits 1:0 – ACIS[1:0]: Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select
These bits determine which compar ator events that trigger the Analog Comparator interrupt. The
different settings are shown in Table 13-2 on page 81.
When changing the ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by
clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the ACSR Register. Otherwise an inter rupt can occur whe n the
bits are changed.
13.2.3 DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0
Bits 1:0 – AIN1D, AIN0D: AIN[1:0] Digital Input Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the AIN1/0 pin is d isable d. The corr e-
sponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is
applied to the AIN1/0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed, this bit should be writ-
ten logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer.
Table 13-2. ACIS1/ACIS0 Settings
ACIS1 ACIS0 Interrupt Mode
0 0 Comparator Interrupt on Output Toggle.
01Reserved
1 0 Comparator Interrupt on Falling Output Edge.
1 1 Comparator Interrupt on Rising Output Edge.
Bit 76543210
0x14 ADC0D ADC2D ADC3D ADC1D AIN1D AIN0D DIDR0
Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
82 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
14. Analog to Digital Converter
14.1 Features 10-bit Resolution
0.5 LSB Integral Non-linearity
± 2 LSB Absolute Accuracy
13 - 260 µs Conversion Time
Up to 15 kSPS at Maximum Resolution
Four Multiplexed Single Ended Input Channels
Optional Left Adjustment for ADC Result Readout
0 - VCC ADC Input Voltage Range
Selectable 1.1V ADC Reference Voltage
Free Running or Sin gle Conversion Mode
ADC Start Conversion by Auto Triggering on Interrupt Sources
Interrupt on ADC Conversion Complete
Sleep Mode Noise Canceler
14.2 Overview The ATtiny13A features a 10-bit successive approximation ADC. A block diagram of the ADC is
shown in Figure 14-1.
Figure 14-1. Analog to Digital Converter Block Schematic
ADC CONVERSION
COMPLETE IRQ
8-BIT DATA BUS
15 0
ADC MULTIPLEXER
SELECT (ADMUX) ADC CTRL. & STATUS
REGISTER (ADCSRA) ADC DATA REGISTER
(ADCH/ADCL)
ADIE
ADATE
ADSC
ADEN
ADIF ADIF
MUX1
MUX0
ADPS0
ADPS1
ADPS2
CONVERSION LOGIC
10-BIT DAC
+
-
SAMPLE & HOLD
COMPARATOR
INTERNAL 1.1V
REFERENCE
MUX DECODER
VCC
ADC3
ADC2
ADC1
ADC0
REFS1
ADLAR
CHANNEL SELECTION
ADC[9:0]
ADC MULTIPLEXER
OUTPUT
PRESCALER
INPUT
MUX
TRIGGER
SELECT
ADTS[2:0]
INTERRUPT
FLAGS
START
83
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The ADC is connecte d to a 4-chan nel Analog M ultiplexer which allows four single-end ed voltage
inputs constructed from the pins of Port B. The single-ended voltage inputs refer to 0V (GND).
The ADC contains a Sample and Hold circuit which ensures that the input voltage to the ADC is
held at a constant level during conversion. Internal reference voltages of nominally 1.1V or VCC
are provided On-chip.
14.3 Operation The ADC converts an analog input voltage to a 10-bit digital value through successive approxi-
mation. The minimum value represents GND and the maximum value represents the voltage on
VCC or an internal 1.1V reference voltage.
The analog input channel is selected by writing to the MUX bits in ADMUX. Any of the ADC input
pins, can be selected as single ended inputs to the ADC.
The ADC is enabled by setting the ADC Enable bit, ADEN in ADCSRA. Voltag e reference and
input channel selections will not go into effect until ADEN is set. The ADC does not consume
power when ADEN is cleared, so it is recommende d to switch off the ADC before en tering power
saving sleep modes.
The ADC generates a 10-bit result which is presented in the ADC Data Registers, ADCH and
ADCL. By default, the result is presented right ad justed, but can optionally be presented left
adjusted by setting the ADLAR bit in ADMUX.
If the result is left ad justed and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read
ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, th en ADCH, to ensure that the content of the data
registers belongs to the same conversion. Once ADCL is read, ADC access to data registers is
blocked. This means that if ADCL has been read, and a conversion completes before ADCH is
read, neither register is updated and the result from the conversion is lost. When ADCH is read,
ADC access to the ADCH and ADCL Registers is re-enabled.
The ADC has its own interrupt which can be triggered wh en a conversion comple tes. When ADC
access to the data registers is prohibited between reading of ADCH and ADCL, the interrupt will
trigger even if the result is lost.
14.4 Starting a Conversion
A single conversion is started by writing a logical one to the ADC Start Conversion bit, ADSC.
This bit stays high as long as the conversion is in progress and w ill be cleared by hardware
when the conversion is com pleted. If a differe nt data channel is selected while a conver sion is in
progress, the ADC will finish the current conversion before performing the channel change.
Alternatively, a conversion can be triggered automatically by various sources. Auto Triggering is
enabled by setting the ADC Auto Trigger Enable bit, ADATE in ADCSRA. The trigger source is
selected by setting the ADC Trigge r Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB (see description of the ADTS
bits for a list of the trigger sources). When a positive edge occurs on the selected trigger signal,
the ADC prescaler is reset and a conversion is started. This provides a method of starting con-
versions at fixed intervals. If the trigger signal still is set when the conversion completes, a new
conversion will not be started. If another positive edge occurs on the trigger signal during con-
version, the edge will be ignored. Note that an Interrupt Flag will be set even if the specific
interrupt is disabled or the Global In terrup t Enab le bit in SREG is cleared. A conversion can thus
be triggered without causing an inter rupt. However, th e Interrupt Flag must be clea red in order to
trigger a new conversion at the next interrupt event.
84 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 14-2. ADC Auto Trigger Logic
Using the ADC Interrupt Flag as a trigger sou rce makes the ADC start a new conver sion as soon
as the ongoing conversion has finished. The ADC then operates in Free Running mode, con-
stantly sampling and up dating the ADC Data Register . The first conversion must be started by
writing a logical one to the ADSC bit in ADCSRA. In this mode the ADC will perform successive
conversions independently of whether the ADC Interrupt Flag, ADIF is cleared or not.
If Auto Triggering is enabled, single conversions can be started by writing ADSC in ADCSRA to
one. ADSC can also be us ed to determine if a conversion is in pr ogress. The ADSC bit will be
read as one during a conversion, independently of how the conversion was started.
14.5 Prescaling and Conversion Timing
By default, the successive approximation circuitry requires an input clock frequency between 50
kHz and 200 kHz to get maximum resolution. If a lower resolution than 10 bits is needed, the
input clock frequency to the ADC can be higher than 200 kHz to get a higher sample rate.
Figure 14-3. ADC Prescaler
The ADC module contains a prescaler, which generates an acceptable ADC clock frequency
from any CPU frequency above 100 kHz. The prescaling is set by the ADPS bits in ADCSRA.
ADSC
ADIF
SOURCE 1
SOURCE n
ADTS[2:0]
CONVERSION
LOGIC
PRESCALER
START CLKADC
.
.
.
.EDGE
DETECTOR
ADATE
7-BIT ADC PRESCALER
ADC CLOCK SOURCE
CK
ADPS0
ADPS1
ADPS2
CK/128
CK/2
CK/4
CK/8
CK/16
CK/32
CK/64
Reset
ADEN
START
85
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The prescaler starts counting from the moment the ADC is switched on by setting the ADEN bit
in ADCSRA. The prescaler keeps running for as long a s the ADEN bit is set, and is co ntinuously
reset when ADEN is low.
When initiating a single ended conversion by setting the ADSC bit in ADCSRA, the conversion
starts at the following rising edge of the ADC clock cycle.
A normal conversion takes 13 ADC clock cycles. The first conversion after the ADC is switched
on (ADEN in ADCSRA is set) takes 25 ADC clock cycles in order to initialize the analog circuitry,
as shown in Figure 14-4 below.
Figure 14-4. ADC Timing Diagram, First Conversion ( Single Conversion Mode)
When the bandgap reference volta ge is used as input to the ADC, it will take a certain time for
the voltage to stabilize. If not sta bilized, the first value read after the first conversion may be
wrong.
The actual sample-and -h old ta kes pla ce 1.5 ADC cl ock cycles after the start of a normal conver-
sion and 14.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of an first conversion. When a conversion is
complete, the result is written to the ADC Data Registers, and ADIF is set. In Single Conv ersio n
mode, ADSC is cleared simultaneously. The software may then set ADSC again, and a new
conversion will be initiated on the first rising ADC clock edge.
Figure 14-5. ADC Timing Diagram, Single Conversion
Sign and MSB of Result
LSB of Result
ADC Clock
ADSC
Sample & Hold
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Cycle Number
ADEN
1212
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2
First Conversion Next
Conversion
3
MUX and REFS
Update MUX and REFS
Update
Conversion
Complete
123456789 10 11 12 13
Sign and MSB of Result
LSB of Result
ADC Clock
ADSC
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Cycle Number 12
One Conversion Next Conversion
3
Sample & Hold
MUX and REFS
Update
Conversion
Complete MUX and REFS
Update
86 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
When Auto Triggering is used, the prescaler is reset when the trigger event occurs, as shown in
Figure 14-6 below. This assur es a fixed delay from the trigger event to the start of conver sion. In
this mode, the sample-and-hold takes place two ADC clock cycles after the rising edge on the
trigger source signal. Thr ee additional CPU clock cycles are used for synchronization logic.
Figure 14-6. ADC Timing Diagram, Auto Triggere d Conversion
In Free Running mode, a new conversion will be started immediately after the conversion com-
pletes, while ADSC remains high.
Figure 14-7. ADC Timing Diagram, Free Run ning Conversion
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 11 12 13
Sign and MSB of Result
LSB of Result
ADC Clock
Trigger
Source
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Cycle Number 12
One Conversion Next Conversion
Conversion
Complete
Prescaler
Reset
ADATE
Prescaler
Reset
Sample &
Hold
MUX and REFS
Update
11 12 13
Sign and MSB of Result
LSB of Result
ADC Clock
ADSC
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Cycle Number 12
One Conversion Next Conversion
34
Conversion
Complete Sample & Hold
MUX and REFS
Update
87
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
For a summary of conversion times, see Ta b le 14 -1.
14.6 Changing Channel or Reference Selection
The MUXn and REFS[1:0] bits in the ADMUX Register are single buffered through a temporary
register to which the CPU has random access. This ensures that the channels and reference
selection only takes place at a safe point during the conversion. The channel and reference
selection is continuou sly updated until a conversio n is started. Once the conversion starts, the
channel and reference selection is locked to ensur e a sufficient samplin g time for the ADC. Co n-
tinuous updating resumes in the last ADC clock cycle before the conversion completes (ADIF in
ADCSRA is set). Note that the conversion starts on the following rising ADC clock edge after
ADSC is written. The user is thus advised not to write new ch annel or refe rence selection valu es
to ADMUX until one ADC clock cycle after ADSC is written.
If Auto Triggering is used, the exact time of the triggering event can be indeterministic. Special
care must be taken when updating the ADMUX Register, in order to control which conversion
will be affected by the new settings.
If both ADATE and ADEN is written to one, an interrupt event can occur at any time. If the
ADMUX Register is changed in this period, the user cannot te ll if the next conversion is based
on the old or the new settings. ADMUX can be safely updated in the following ways:
When ADATE or ADEN is cleared.
During conversion, minimum one ADC clock cycle after the trigger event.
After a conversion, before the Interrupt Flag used as trigger source is cleared.
When updating ADMUX in one of these conditions, the new settings will affect the next ADC
conversion.
14.6.1 ADC Input Channels
When changing channel selections, the user should observe the following guidelines to ensure
that the correct channel is selected:
In Single Conversion mode, always select the chann el before starting the conversion. The chan-
nel selection may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the
simplest method is to wa it for the conver sion to complete before cha nging the ch annel selectio n.
In Free Running mode, always select the channel before starting the first conversion. The chan-
nel selection may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the
simplest method is to wait for the first conversion to complete, and then change the cha nnel
selection. Since the next conversion has already started automatically, the next result will reflect
the previous channel selection. Subsequent conversions will reflect the new channel selection.
Table 14-1. ADC Conve rsion Time
Condition Sample & Hold (Cycles
from Start of Conversion) Conversion Time (Cycles)
First conversion 13.5 25
Normal conversions 1.5 13
Auto Triggered conversi ons 2 13.5
88 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
14.6.2 ADC Voltage Reference
The referenc e voltage for the ADC (VREF) indicates the conversion range for the ADC. Single
ended channels that exceed VREF will result in code s close to 0x3FF. VREF can be selected as
either VCC, or internal 1.1V reference. The first ADC conversion result after switching reference
voltage source may be inaccurate, and the user is advised to discard this result.
14.7 ADC Noise Canceler
The ADC features a noise canceler that enables conversion during sleep mode to reduce noise
induced from the CPU core and other I/O peripherals. The noise canceler can be used with ADC
Noise Reduc tion an d Id le m ode. To m ake use of this fe atur e, th e fo llowing pr ocedur e sh ould b e
used:
Make sure that the ADC is enable d and is not busy converting. Single Conversion mode must
be selected and the ADC conversion complete interrupt must be enabled.
Enter ADC Noise Reduction mode (or Idle mode). The ADC will start a conversion once the
CPU has been halted.
If no other interrupts occur before the ADC conversion completes, the ADC interrupt will
wake up the CPU and execute the ADC Conversion Complete inter rupt routine. If another
interrupt wakes up the CPU before the ADC conversion is complete, the interrupt will be
executed, and an ADC Conversion Complete interrupt request will be generated when the
ADC conversion completes. The CPU will remain in active mode until a new sleep command
is executed.
Note that the ADC will not be automatically turned off when entering other sleep mod es than Idle
mode and ADC Noise Reduction mode. The user is advised to write zero to ADEN before enter-
ing such sleep modes to avoid excessive power consumption.
14.8 Analog Input Circuitry
The analog input circuitry fo r single ended ch annels is shown in Figure 14-8 An analog source
applied to ADCn is subjected to pin capacitance and input leakage of that pin, regardless if the
channel is chosen as inpu t for th e ADC, or not. When the channel is selected, the source drives
the S/H capacitor through the series resistance (combined resistance in input path).
Figure 14-8. Analog Input Circuitry
Note: The capacitor in the figure depicts the total capacitance, including the sample/hold capacitor and
any stray or parasitic capa citance inside the device. The value given is worst case.
n
IIH
1..100 kohm
CS/H= 14 pF
IIL
89
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The ADC is optimized for analog signals with an output impedance of approximately 10 kΩ or
less. If such a source is used, the sampling time will be neglig ible. If a sour ce with higher impe d-
ance is used, the sampling time will depend on how long time the source needs to charge the
S/H capacitor, with can vary widely. The user is recommended to only use low impedant sources
with slowly varying signals, since this minimizes the required charge transfer to the S/H
capacitor.
Signal components hig her than the Nyquist frequenc y (fADC/2) should not be prese nt to avoid
distortion from unpredictab le signal convolution. Th e user is advised to remove high frequency
components with a low-pass filter before applying the signals as inputs to the ADC.
14.9 Analog Noise Canceling Techniques
Digital circuitry inside and outside the device generates EMI which might affect the accuracy of
analog measurements. When conversion accuracy is critical, the noise level can be reduced by
applying the following techniques:
Keep analog signal paths as short as possible.
Make sure analog tracks run over the analog ground plane.
Keep analog tracks well away from high-speed switching digital tracks.
If any port pin is used as a digital output, it mustn’t switch while a conversion is in progress.
Place bypass capacitors as close to VCC and GND pins as possible.
Where high ADC accuracy is requir ed it is recommend ed to use ADC Noise Redu ction Mode , as
described in Section 14.7 on page 88. This is especially the case when system clock frequency
is above 1 MHz. A good system design with properly placed, external bypass capacitors does
reduce the need for usin g ADC Noise Reduction Mode
14.10 ADC Accuracy Definitions
An n-bit single-ended ADC converts a voltage linearly between GND and VREF in 2n steps
(LSBs). The lowest code is read as 0, and the highest code is read as 2n-1.
Several parameters describe the deviation from the ideal behavior:
90 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Offset: The deviation of the first transition (0x000 to 0x001) compared to the ideal transition
(at 0.5 LSB). Ideal value : 0 LSB.
Figure 14-9. Offset Error
Gain Error: After adjusting for offset, the Gain Error is found as the deviation of the last
transition (0x3FE to 0x3FF) compared to the ideal transition (at 1.5 LSB below maximum).
Ideal value: 0 LSB
Figure 14-10. Gain Error
Output Code
VREF Input Voltage
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
Offset
Error
Output Code
VREF Input Voltage
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
Gain
Error
91
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Integral Non-linearity (INL): After adjusting for offset and gain error, the INL is the maximum
deviation of an actual transition compared to an ideal transition for any code. Ideal value: 0
LSB.
Figure 14-11. Integral Non-linearity (INL)
Differential Non-linearity (DNL): The maximu m deviation of the actual code width (the interval
between two adjacent transition s) from the ideal code width (1 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB.
Figure 14-12. Differential Non-linearity (DNL)
Output Code
VREF Input Voltage
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
INL
Output Code
0x3FF
0x000
0VREF Input Voltage
DNL
1 LSB
92 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Quantization Error: Due to the quantization of the input volt age into a fin ite number of codes,
a range of input voltages (1 LSB wide) will code to the same value. Always ± 0.5 LSB.
Absolute Accuracy: The maximum deviation of an actual (unadjusted) transitio n comp ared to
an ideal transition for any code. This is the compound effect of offset, gain error, differential
error, non-linearity, and quantization error. Ideal value: ± 0.5 LSB.
14.11 ADC Conversion Result
After the conversion is complete (ADIF is high), the conversion result can be found in the ADC
Result Registers (ADCL, ADCH).
For single ended conversion, the result is
where VIN is the voltage on the selected input pin and VREF the selected voltage reference (see
Table 14-2 on page 92 and Table 14-3 on page 93). 0x000 represents analog ground, and
0x3FF represents the selected reference voltage minus one LSB.
14.12 Register Description
14.12.1 ADMUX – ADC Multiplexer Selection Register
Bits 7, 4:2 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bit 6 – REFS0: Reference Selection Bit
This bit selects the voltage reference for the ADC, as shown in Table 14-2. If this bit is changed
during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete (ADIF in
ADCSRA is set).
Bit 5 – ADLAR: ADC Left Adjust Result
The ADLAR bit affects the presentation of the ADC conversion result in the ADC Data Register.
Write one to ADLAR to left adjust the result. Otherwise, the result is right adjusted. Changing the
ADLAR bit will affect the ADC Data Register immediately, regardless of any ongoing conver-
sions. For a complete de scription of this bit, see “ADCL and ADCH – The ADC Data Register” on
page 94.
ADC VIN 1024
VREF
--------------------------=
Bit 76543210
0x07 REFS0 ADLAR MUX1 MUX0 ADMUX
Read/Write R R/W R/W R R R R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
Table 14-2. Voltage Reference Selections for ADC
REFS0 Voltage Reference Selection
0V
CC used as analog reference.
1 Internal Voltage Reference.
93
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Bits 1:0 – MUX[1:0]: Analog Channel Selection Bits
The value of these bits selects which combination of analog inputs are connected to the ADC.
See Table 14-3 for details. If these bits are changed during a conversion, the change will not go
in effect until this conversion is complete (ADIF in ADCSRA is set).
14.12.2 ADCSRA – ADC Control and Status Register A
Bit 7 – ADEN: ADC Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the ADC. By writing it to zero, the ADC is turned off. Turning the
ADC off while a conversion is in progress, will terminate this conversion.
Bit 6 – ADSC: ADC Start Conve r sion
In Single Conversion mode, write this bit to one to start each conversion. In Free Ru nning mode,
write this bit to one to start th e first conversion. The first conversion after ADSC has been wr itten
after the ADC has been enabled, or if ADSC is written at the same time as the ADC is enabled,
will take 25 ADC clock cycles instead of the normal 13. This first conversion performs initializa-
tion of the ADC.
ADSC will read as one as long as a conversion is in progress. When the conversion is complete,
it returns to zero. Writing zero to this bit has no effect.
Bit 5 – ADATE: ADC Auto Trigger Enable
When this bit is written to one, Auto Triggering of the ADC is enabled. The ADC will start a con-
version on a positive edge of th e selected trigger signal. The trigger source is selected by setting
the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB.
Bit 4 – ADIF: ADC Interrupt Flag
This bit is set wh en an ADC conver sion comple tes and the data registers are upd ated. The ADC
Conversion Complete Interrupt is executed if the ADIE bit and the I-bit in SREG are set. ADIF is
cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively,
ADIF is cleared by writing a logical one to the flag. Beware that if doing a Read-Modify-Write on
ADCSRA, a pending interrupt can be disabled. This also applies if the SBI and CBI instructions
are used.
Table 14-3. Input Channel Selections
MUX[1:0] Single Ended Input
00 ADC0 (PB5 )
01 ADC1 (PB2 )
10 ADC2 (PB4 )
11 ADC3 (PB3)
Bit 76543210
0x06 ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 ADCSRA
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
94 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Bit 3 – ADIE: ADC Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in SREG is set, the ADC Conversion Complete Inter-
rupt is activated.
Bits 2:0 – ADPS[2:0]: ADC Prescaler Select Bits
These bits determine the division factor between the system clock frequency and th e inpu t clock
to the ADC.
14.12.3 ADCL and ADCH – The ADC Data Register
14.12.3.1 ADLAR = 0
14.12.3.2 ADLAR = 1
When an ADC conversion is complete, the result is found in these two registers.
When ADCL is read, the ADC Data Register is not updated until ADCH is read. Consequently, if
the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read
ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH.
Table 14-4. ADC Prescaler Selections
ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 Division Factor
000 2
001 2
010 4
011 8
100 16
101 32
110 64
111 128
Bit 151413121110 9 8
0x05 ––––––ADC9 ADC8 ADCH
0x04 ADC7 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 ADC3 ADC2 ADC1 ADC0 ADCL
76543210
Read/WriteRRRRRRRR
RRRRRRRR
Initial Value00000000
00000000
Bit 151413121110 9 8
0x05 ADC9 ADC8 ADC7 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 ADC3 ADC2 ADCH
0x04 ADC1 ADC0 ––––––ADCL
76543210
Read/WriteRRRRRRRR
RRRRRRRR
Initial Value00000000
00000000
95
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The ADLAR bit in ADMUX, and the MUXn bits in ADMUX affect the way the result is read from
the registers. If ADLAR is set, the result is left adjusted. If ADLAR is cleared (defau lt), the resu lt
is right adjusted.
ADC[9:0]: ADC Conversion Result
These bits represent the result from the conversion, as detailed in “ADC Conversion Result” on
page 92.
14.12.4 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B
Bits 7, 5:3 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and will always read as zero.
Bits 2:0 – ADTS[2:0]: ADC Auto Trigger Source
If ADATE in ADCSRA is written to one, the value of these bits selects which source will trigger
an ADC conversion. If ADATE is cleared, the ADTS[2:0] settings will have no effect. A conver-
sion will be triggered by the rising edge of the selected In terrupt Flag. Note that switching from a
trigger source that is cleared to a trigger source that is set, will generate a positive edge on the
trigger signal. If ADEN in ADCSRA is set, this will start a conversion. Switching to Free Running
mode (ADTS[2:0]=0) will not cause a trigger event, even if the ADC Interrupt Flag is set.
14.12.5 DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0
Bits 5:2 – ADC3D:ADC0D: ADC[3:0] Digital Input Disable
When a bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the corresponding ADC pin is disabled.
The corresponding PIN register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog
signal is applied to the ADC[7:0] pin and the digi tal input from this pin is not needed, this bit
should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer.
Bit 76543210
0x03 ACME ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 ADCSRB
Read/Write R R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
Table 14-5. ADC Auto Trigger Source Selections
ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 Trigger Source
0 0 0 Free Running mode
0 0 1 Analog Comparator
0 1 0 External Interrupt Request 0
0 1 1 Timer/Counter Compare Match A
1 0 0 Timer/Counter Overflow
1 0 1 Timer/Counter Compare Match B
1 1 0 Pi n Change Interrupt Request
Bit 76543210
0x14 ADC0D ADC2D ADC3D ADC1D AIN1D AIN0D DIDR0
Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
96 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
15. debugWIRE On-chip Debug System
15.1 Features Complete Program Flow Control
Emulates All On-chip Fu nc tio ns , Both Digital and Analog, exce pt RESET Pin
Real-time Operation
Symbolic Debugging Support (Both at C and Assembler Source Level, or for Other HLLs)
Unlimited Number of Program Break Points (Using Software Break Points)
Non-intrusive Operation
Electrical Characteristics Id entical to Real Device
Automatic Configuration System
High-Speed Operation
Programming of Non-volatile Memories
15.2 Overview Th e debugWIRE On-chip debug system uses a One-wire, bi-directional interface to control the
program flow, execute AVR instructions in the CPU and to program the different non-volatile
memories.
15.3 Physical Interface
When the debugWIRE Enable (DWEN) fuse is programmed and lock bits are unprogrammed,
the debugWIRE system within the target device is activated. The RESET port pin is configured
as a wire-AND (open-drain) bi-directional I/O pin with pull-up enabled and becomes the commu-
nication gateway between target and emulator.
Figure 15-1 shows the schematic of a target MCU, with debugWIRE enabled, and the emulator
connector. The system clock is not affected by debugWIRE and will always be the clock source
selected by the CKSEL fuses.
Figure 15-1. The debugWIRE Setup
d
W
GND
dW(RESET)
VCC
1.8 - 5.5
V
97
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
When designing a system where debugWIRE will be used, the following must be observed:
Pull-Up resistor on the dW/(RESET) line must be in the range of 10k to 20 kΩ. However, the
pull-up resistor is optional.
Connecting the RESET pin directly to VCC will not work.
Capacitors inserted on the RESET pin must be disconnected when using debugWire.
All external reset sources must be disconnected.
15.4 Software Break Points
debugWIRE supports Program memory Break Points by the AVR Break instruction. Setting a
Break Point in AVR Studio® will insert a BREAK instruction in the Program memory. The instruc-
tion replaced by the BREAK instruction will be stored. When program execution is continued, the
stored instruction will be executed before continuing from the Program memory. A break can be
inserted manually by putting the BREAK instruction in the program.
The Flash must be re-prog rammed each time a Break Point is changed. This is automatically
handled by AVR Studio through the debugWIRE interface. The use of Break Points will therefore
reduce the Flash Data reten tion. Devices used fo r debu gging pur poses should not be shipped to
end customers.
15.5 Limitations of debugWIRE
The debugWIRE communication pin (dW) is physically located on the same pin as External
Reset (RESET). An External Reset source is therefore not supported when the debugWIRE is
enabled.
The debugWIRE system accurately emulates all I/O functions when running at full speed, i.e.,
when the program in the CPU is running. When the CPU is stopped, care must be taken while
accessing some of the I/O Registers via the debugger (AVR Studio). See the debugWIRE docu-
mentation for detailed description of the limitations.
The debugWIRE interface is asynchronous, which means that the debugger needs to synchro-
nize to the system clock. If the system clock is changed by software (e.g. by writing CLKPS bits)
communication via debugWIRE may fail. Also, clock frequencies below 100 kHz may cause
communication problems.
A programmed DWEN fuse enables some parts of the clo ck system to be running in all sleep
modes. This will increase the power consumption while in sleep. Thus, the DWEN fuse should
be disabled when debugWire is not used.
15.6 Register Description
The following section de scr ib es th e re gis te rs us ed with th e debu g Wire .
15.6.1 DWDR –debugWire Data Register
The DWDR Register provides a communicatio n channel from the running program in the MCU
to the debugger. This register is only acce ssible by the debugWIRE and can therefore not be
used as a general purpose register in the normal operations.
Bit 76543210
0x2E DWDR[7:0] DWDR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
98 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
16. Self-Programming the Flash
The device provides a Self-Programming mechanism for downloading and uploading program
code by the MCU itself. The Self-Programming can use any available data interface and associ-
ated protocol to read code and write (program) that code into the Program memory. The SPM
instruction is disabled by default but it can be enabled by programming the SELFPRGEN fuse
(to “0”).
The Program memory is updated in a page by page fashion. Before programming a page with
the data stored in the tempo rary page buffer, the page must be era sed. The temporary pag e buf-
fer is filled one word at a time using SPM and the buffer can be filled either before the Pag e
Erase command or between a Page Erase and a Page Write operation:
Alternative 1, fill the buffer before a Page Erase
Fill temporary page buffer
Perform a Page Erase
Perform a Page Write
Alternative 2, fill the buffer after Page Erase
Perform a Page Erase
Fill temporary page buffer
Perform a Page Write
If only a part of the page needs to be changed, the rest of the page must be stored (for example
in the temporary page buffer) before the erase, and then be re-written. When using alternative 1,
the Boot Loader provides an effe ctive Read- Mod ify- Write fe atur e which allows the user software
to first read the page, do the necessary changes, and then write back the modified data. If alter-
native 2 is used, it is not p ossible to read the old data while loading since the page is already
erased. The temporary page buffer can be accessed in a random sequence. It is essential that
the page address used in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation is addressing the
same page.
16.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM
To execute Page Erase, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “00000011” to SPMCSR and
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored.
The page address must be written to PCPAGE in the Z-register. Othe r bits in the Z-pointer will
be ignored during this operation.
Note: The CPU is halted during the Page Erase operation.
16.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading)
To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z-pointer and data in R1:R0, write
“00000001” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. Th e
content of PCWORD in the Z-register is used to address the data in the temporary buffer. The
temporary buffer will auto-erase after a Page Write operation or by writing the CTPB bit in
SPMCSR. It is also erased after a system reset. Note that it is not possible to write more than
one time to each address without erasing the temporary buffer.
99
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
If the EEPROM is written in the middle of an SPM Page Load operation, all data loaded will be
lost.
16.3 Performing a Page Write
To execute Page Write, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “00000101” to SPMCSR and
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored.
The page address must be written to PCPAGE. Other bits in the Z-pointer must be written to
zero during this operation.
Note: The CPU is halted during the Page Write operation.
16.4 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming
The Z-pointer is used to address the SPM commands.
Since the Flash is organized in pages (see Table 17-5 on page 105), the Program Counter can
be treated as having two differ ent sections. One section, cons isting of the least significant bits, is
addressing the words within a page, while the most significant bits are addressing the pages.
This is shown in Figure 16-1. Note that the Page Erase and Page Write operations are
addressed independently. Therefore it is of major importance that the software addresses the
same page in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation.
Figure 16-1. Addressing the Flash During SPM(1)
Note: 1. The variables used in Figure 16-1 are listed in Table 17-5 on page 105.
Bit 151413121110 9 8
ZH (R31) Z15 Z14 Z13 Z12 Z11 Z10 Z9 Z8
ZL (R30) Z7Z6Z5Z4Z3Z2Z1Z0
76543210
PROGRAM MEMORY
0115
Z - REGISTER
BIT
0
ZPAGEMSB
WORD ADDRESS
WITHIN A PAGE
PAGE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE FLASH
ZPCMSB
INSTRUCTION WORD
PA G E PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]:
00
01
02
PAGEEND
PA G E
PCWORDPCPAGE
PCMSB PAGEMSB
PROGRAM
COUNTER
100 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The LPM instruction uses the Z-pointer to store the address. Since this instruction addresses the
Flash byte-b y-b yt e, also the LSB (bit Z0) of the Z-po in te r is used .
16.5 EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR
Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to Flash. Reading the
fuses and lock bits from software will also be prevented during the EEPROM write operation. It is
recommended that the user checks the status bit (EEPE) in the EECR Register and verifies that
the bit is cleared before writing to the SPMCSR Register.
16.6 Reading Fuse and Lock Bits from Firmware
It is possible to read fuse and lock bits from software.
16.6.1 Reading Lock Bits from Firmware
Issuing an LPM instruction within three CPU cycles after RFLB and SELFPRGEN bits have
been set in SPMCSR will return lock bit values in the destination register. The RFLB and SELF-
PRGEN bits automatically clear upon completion of r eading the lo ck bits, or if no LPM instruction
is executed within three CPU cycles, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four CPU cycles.
When RFLB and SELFPRGEN are cleared, LPM functions normally.
To read the lock bits, follow the below procedure.
1. Load the Z-pointer with 0x0001.
2. Set RFLB and SELFPRGEN bits in SPMCSR.
3. Issuing an LPM instruction within three clock cycles will return lock bits in the destina-
tion register.
If successful, the contents of the destination register are as follows.
See section “Program And Data Memory Lock Bits” on page 103 for more information on lock
bits.
16.6.2 Reading Fuse Bits from Firmware
The algorithm for reading fuse bytes is similar to the one described above for reading lock bits,
only the addresses are different.
To read the Fuse Low Byte (FLB), follow the below procedure:
1. Load the Z-pointer with 0x0000.
2. Set RFLB and SELFPRGEN bits in SPMCSR.
3. Issuing an LPM instruction within three clock cycles will FLB in the destination register.
If successful, the contents of the destination register are as follows.
Bit 76543210
Rd ––––––LB2LB1
Bit 76543210
Rd FLB7 FLB6 FLB5 FLB4 FLB3 FLB2 FLB1 FLB0
101
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
To read the Fuse High Byte (FHB), simply replace the address in the Z-pointer with 0x0003 and
repeat the procedure above.
If successful, the contents of the destination register are as follows.
See sections “Program And Data Memory Lock Bits” on pa ge 103 and Fuse Bytes” on page 104
for more informa tio n on fuse and lock bits.
16.7 Preventing Flash Corruption
During periods of low VCC, the Flash program can be corrupted because the supply voltage is
too low for the CPU and the Flash to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board
level systems using the Flash, and the same design solutions should be applied.
A Flash program co rr uptio n can be caus ed b y two situ atio ns when th e voltag e is too low. Fi rst, a
regular write sequence to the Flash requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly,
the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage for executing instructions
is too low.
Flash corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations (o ne is
sufficient):
1. Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage.
This can be done by enabling th e internal Brown-out Detector (BOD) if the operating
voltage matches the detection level. If not, an external low VCC reset protection circuit
can be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progr ess, the write operation
will be completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient.
2. Keep the AVR core in Power-down sleep mode during periods of low VCC. This will pre-
vent the CPU from attemp ting to decode and execute instructions, effectively protecting
the SPMCSR Register and thus the Flash from unintentional writes.
16.8 Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM
The calibrated RC Oscillator is used to time Flash accesses. Table 16-1 on page 101 shows the
typical programming time for Flash accesses from the CPU.
Note: 1. The min and max programming times is per individual operation.
Bit 76543210
Rd FHB7 FHB6 FHB5 FHB4 FHB3 FHB2 FHB1 FHB0
Table 16-1. SPM Programming Time(1)
Symbol Min Programming Time Max Programming Time
Flash write (Page Erase, Page Write, and
write lock bits by SPM) 3.7 ms 4.5 ms
102 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
16.9 Register Description
16.9.1 SPMCSR – Sto r e Program Memory Control and Status Register
The Store Program Me mory Control an d Status Regi ster contains the control bits n eeded to con-
trol the Program memory operations.
Bits 7:5 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13A and always read as zero.
Bit 4 – CTPB: Clear Temporary Page Buffer
If the CTPB bit is written while filling the temporary page buffer, the temporary page buffer will be
cleared and the data will be lost.
Bit 3 – RFLB: Read Fuse and Lock Bits
An LPM instruction within three cycles after RFLB and SELFPRGEN are set in the SPMCSR
Register, will read either the lock bits or the fuse bits (depending on Z0 in the Z-pointer) into the
destination register. See “EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR” on page 100 for details.
Bit 2 – PGWRT: Page Write
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four
clock cycles executes Page Write, with the data stored in the temporary buffer. The page
address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The
PGWRT bit will auto-clear upon completion of a Page Write, or if no SPM instruction is executed
within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire Pag e Write op e ra tio n.
Bit 1 – PGERS: Page Erase
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four
clock cycles executes Page Erase. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-
pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will auto-clear upon completion of a
Page Erase, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted dur-
ing the entire Page Write operation.
Bit 0 – SELFPRGEN: Self Programming Enable
This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If written to one together with
either CTPB, RFLB, PGWRT, or PGERS, the following SPM instruction will have a special
meaning, see description above. If only SELFPRGEN is written, the following SPM instruction
will store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer addressed by the Z-pointer. The LSB
of the Z-pointer is ignored. The SELFPRGEN bit will auto-c lear upon completion of an SPM
instruction, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. During Page Erase and
Page Write, the SELFPRGEN bit remains high until the op erat ion is comp lete d.
Writing any other combination than “10001”, “01001”, “00101”, “00011” or “00001” in the lower
five bits will have no effect.
Bit 7654321 0
0x37 CTPB RFLB PGWRT PGERS SELFPRGEN SPMCSR
Read/Write R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Valu e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
103
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
17. Memory Programming
This section describes how ATtiny 13A memories can be programmed.
17.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits
ATtiny13A provides two lock bits which can be left unprogrammed (“1”) or can be programmed
(“0”) to obtain the additional security listed in Table 17-2 on page 103. The lock bits can be
erased to “1” with the Chip Erase command, only.
Program memory can be read out via the debugWIRE interface when the DWEN fuse is pro-
grammed, even if the lock bits are set. Thus, when lock bit security is required, debugWIRE
should always be disabled by clearing the DWEN fuse.
Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
Notes: 1. Program fuse bits before lock bits. See section “Fuse Bytes” on page 104.
2. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
Table 17-1. Lock Bit Byte
Lock Bit Byte Bit No Description Default Value (1)
7 1 (unprogrammed)
6 1 (unprogrammed)
5 1 (unprogrammed)
4 1 (unprogrammed)
3 1 (unprogrammed)
2 1 (unprogrammed)
LB2 1 Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed)
LB1 0 Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed)
Table 17-2. Lock Bit Protection Modes
Memory Lock Bits (1) (2)
Protection TypeLB Mode LB2 LB1
1 1 1 No memory lock features enabled.
210
Further programming of the Flash and EEPROM is disabled in
High-voltage and Serial Programming mode. Fuse bits are
locked in both Serial and High-vol tage Programming mode.
debugWire is disabled.
300
Further programming and verification of the Flash and
EEPROM is disabled in High-voltage and Serial Programming
mode. Fuse bits are locked in both Serial and High-voltage
Programming mode. debugW ire is disabled.
104 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
17.2 Fuse Bytes The ATtiny13A has two fuse bytes. Table 17-3 on page 104 and Table 17-4 on page 104
describe briefly the functionality of all the fuses and how they are mapped into the fuse bytes.
Note that the fuses are read as logical zero, “0”, if they are programmed.
Notes: 1. Enables SPM instruction. See “Se lf-Programming the Flash” on page 98.
2. DWEN must be unprogrammed when lock Bit security is required. See “Program And Data
Memory Lock Bits” on page 103.
3. See Table 18-6 on page 120 for BODLEVEL fuse decoding.
4. See “Alternate Functions of Port B” on page 55 for description of RSTDISBL and DWEN fuses.
When programming the RSTDISBL fuse, Hig h-voltage Serial prog ramming has to be used to
change fuses to perform further programming.
Notes: 1. The SPIEN fuse is not accessible in SPI Programming mode.
2. Programming this fues will disable the Watchdog Timer Interrupt. See “Watchdog Timer” on
page 38 for details.
3. See “System Clock Prescaler” on page 26 for details.
4. The default value of SUT [1 :0 ] results in maximum start-up time for the default clock source.
See Table 18-3 on page 119 for details.
5. The default setting of CKSEL[1:0] results in internal RC Oscillator @ 9.6 M Hz. See Table 18-3
on page 119 for details.
Table 17-3. Fuse High Byte
Fuse Bit Bit No Description Default Value
7 1 (unprogrammed)
6 1 (unprogrammed)
5 1 (unprogrammed)
SELFPRGEN(1) 4 Self Programming Enable 1 (unprogrammed)
DWEN(2) 3 debugWire Enable 1 (unprogrammed)
BODLEVEL1(3) 2 Brown-out Detector trigger level 1 (unprogrammed)
BODLEVEL0(3) 1 Brown-out Detector trigger level 1 (unprogrammed)
RSTDISBL(4) 0 External Reset disable 1 (unprogrammed)
Table 17-4. Fuse Low Byte
Fuse Bit Bit No Description Default Value
SPIEN(1) 7Enable Serial Programming and Data
Downloading 0 (programmed)
(SPI prog. enabled)
EESAVE 6 Preserve EEPROM memory through
Chip Erase 1 (unprogrammed)
(memory not preserved)
WDTON(2) 5 Watchdog Timer always on 1 (unprogrammed)
CKDIV8(3) 4 Divide clock by 8 0 (programmed)
SUT1(4) 3 Select start-up time 1 (unprogrammed)
SUT0(4) 2 Select start-up time 0 (programmed)
CKSEL1(5) 1 Select Clock source 1 (unprogrammed)
CKSEL0(5) 0 Select Clock source 0 (programmed)
105
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Note that fuse bits are locked if Lock Bit 1 (LB1) is programmed. Program the fuse bits before
programming the lock bits. The status of the fuse bits is not affected by Chip Erase.
Fuse bits can also be read by the device firmware. See section “Reading Fuse and Loc k Bits
from Firmware” on page 100.
17.2.1 Latching of Fuses
The fuse values are latched when the device enters programming mode and changes of the
fuse values will have no effect until the part leaves Programming mode. This does not apply to
the EESAVE fuse which will take effect once it is programmed. The fuses are also latched on
Power-up in Normal mode.
17.3 Calibration Bytes
The signature area of the ATtiny13A contains two bytes of calibration data for the interna l oscil-
lator. The calibration data in the high byte of address 0x00 is for use with the oscillator set to 9.6
MHz operation. During reset, this byte is automatically written into the OSCCAL register to
ensure correct frequency of the oscillator.
There is a separate calibration byte for the internal oscillator in 4.8 MHz mode of opera tion but
this data is not loaded automatically. The hardware always loads the 9.6 MHz calibration data
during reset. To use separate calibration data for the oscillator in 4.8 MHz mode the OSCCAL
register must be updated by firmware. The calibration data for 4.8 MHz operation is located in
the high byte at address 0x01 of the signature area.
17.4 Signature Bytes
All Atmel microcontrollers have a three- byte signature code which identifies the device. This
code can be read in both serial and high-vo ltage programming mode, even when the device is
locked. The three bytes reside in a separate address space.
For the ATtiny13A the signature bytes are:
0x000: 0x1E (indicates manufactured by Atmel).
0x001: 0x90 (indicates 1 KB Flash memory).
0x002: 0x07 (indicates ATtiny13A device when 0x001 is 0x90).
17.5 Page Size
Table 17-5. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the Flash
Flash Size Page Size PCWORD No. of Pages PCPAGE PCMSB
512 words (1K byte) 16 words PC[3:0] 32 PC[8:4] 8
Table 17-6. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the EEPROM
EEPROM Size Page Size PCWORD No. of Pages PCPAGE EEAMSB
64 bytes 4 bytes EEA[1:0] 16 EEA[5:2] 5
106 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
17.6 Serial Programming
Both the Flash and EEPROM memory arrays can be programmed using the serial SPI bus while
RESET is pulled to GND. The serial interface consists of pins SCK, MOSI (inpu t) and MISO (out-
put). See Figure 17-1.
Figure 17-1. Serial Programming and Verify
Note: If clocked by internal oscillator the r e is no need to connect a clock source to the CLKI pin.
After RESET is set low, the Prog ramming Enable in struction needs to be executed first before
program/erase operations can be executed.
Note: In Table 17-7 above, the pin mapping for SPI programming is listed. Not all parts use the SPI pins
dedicated for the internal SPI interface.
When programming the EEPROM, an auto-erase cycle is built into the self-timed programming
operation (in the Serial mode ONLY) and there is no need to first execute the Chip Erase
instruction. The Chip Erase operation turns the content of every memory location in both the
Program and EEPROM arrays into 0xFF.
Depending on CKSEL fuses, a valid clock must be present. The minimum low and high periods
for the serial clock (SCK) input are defined as follows:
Low: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12 MHz
High: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12 MHz
Table 17-7. Pin Mapping Serial Programming
Symbol Pins I/O Description
MOSI PB0 I Serial Data in
MISO PB1 O Serial Data out
SCK PB2 I Serial Clock
VCC
GND
SCK
MIS
O
MOSI
RESET
+1.8 - 5.5V
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB5
107
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
17.6.1 Serial Programming Algorithm
When writing serial data to the ATtiny13A, data is clocked on the rising edge of SCK.
When reading data from the ATtiny13A, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK. See Figure
18-4 on page 122 and Figure 18-3 on page 122 for timing details.
To program and ve rify the ATtiny13A in the Seria l Programming mode, the following sequence is
recommended (see four byte instruction formats in Table 17-9 on page 108):
1. Power-up sequence:
Apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”. In some sys-
tems, the programmer can not guarantee that SCK is held low during power-up. In this
case, RESET must be given a positive pulse after SCK has been set to “0”. The pulse
duration must be at least tRST (miniumum pulse widht of RESET pin, see Table 18-4 on
page 120 and Figure 19-58 on page 153) plus two CPU clock cycles.
2. Wait for at least 20 ms and enable serial programming by sending the Programming
Enable serial instruction to pin MOSI.
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of syn-
chronization. When in sync. the second byte (0x53), will echo back when issuing the
third byte of the Progr amming Enable instruction. Whethe r the echo is correct or not, all
four bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the 0x53 did not echo back, give
RESET a positive pulse and issue a new Programming Enable comm and.
4. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory pa ge is loaded one byte at
a time by supplying the 4 LSB of the addre ss and dat a together with the Load Progra m
memory Page instruction. To ensure correct loading of the page, the data low byte must
be loaded before data high byte is applied for a given address. The Program memory
Page is stored by loading the Write Program memory Page instruction with the 5 MSB
of the address. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH
before issuing the next page. (See Table 17-8 on page 108.) Accessing the serial pro-
gramming interface before the Flash write operation completes can result in incorrect
programming.
5. A: The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and
data together with the appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is
first automatically erased before new data is written. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used,
the user must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte. (See Table 17-8 on
page 108.) In a chip erased device, no 0xFFs in the data file(s) need to be pro-
grammed.
B: The EEPROM array is programmed one page at a time. The Memory p age is loaded
one byte at a time by supplying the 2 LSB of the address and data together with the
Load EEPROM Memory Page instruction. The EEPROM Memory Page is stored by
loading the Write EEPROM Memory Page Instruction with the 4 MSB of the address.
When using EEPROM page access only byte locations loaded with the Load EEPROM
Memory Page instruction is altered. The remaining locations remain unchanged. If poll-
ing (RDY/BSY) is not used, the used must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the
next page (See Table 17-6 on page 105). In a chip erased device, no 0xFF in the data
file(s) need to be programmed.
6. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the
content at the selected address at serial output MISO.
7. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal
operation.
8. Power-off sequence (if needed):
Set RESET to “1”.
Turn VCC power off.
108 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
.
17.6.2 Serial Programming Instruction set
The instruction set is described in Table 17-9.
Table 17-8. Minimum Wait Delay Before Writing the Next Flash or EEPROM Location
Symbol Minimum Wait Delay
tWD_FLASH 4.5 ms
tWD_EEPROM 4.0 ms
tWD_ERASE 9.0 ms
tWD_FUSE 4.5 ms
Table 17-9. Serial Programming Instruction Set
Instruction
Instruction Format
OperationByte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte4
Programming Enable 1010 1100 0101 0011 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Enable Serial Programming after
RESET goes low.
Chip Erase 1010 1100 100x xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Chip Erase EEPROM and Flash.
Read Program Memory 0010 H000 0000 000a bbbb bbbb oooo oooo Read H (high or low) data o from
Program memory at word address a:b.
Load Program Memory Page 0100 H000 000x xxxx xxxx bbbb iiii iiii
Write H (high or low) data i to Program
memory page at word address b. Data
low byte must be loaded before Data
high byte is applied within the same
address.
Write Program Memory Page 0100 1100 0000 000a bbbb xxxx xxxx xxxx Write Program memory Page at
address a:b.
Read EEPROM Memory 1010 0000 000x xxxx xxbb bbbb oooo oooo Read data o from EEPROM memory at
address b.
Write EEPROM Memory 1100 0000 000x xxxx xxbb bbbb iiii iiii Writ e da ta i to EEPROM memory at
address b.
Load EEPROM Memo ry
Page (page access) 1100 0001 0000 0000 0000 00bb iiii iiii Load data i to EEPROM memory p age
buffer. After data is loaded, program
EEPROM page.
Write EEPROM Memory
Page (page access) 1100 0010 00xx xxxx xxbb bb00 xxxx xxxx Write EEPROM page at address b.
Read Lock Bits 0101 1000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxoo oooo Read lock bits. “0” = programmed, “1”
= unprogrammed. See Table 17-1 on
page 103 for details.
Write Lock Bits 1010 1100 111x xxxx xxxx xxxx 11ii iiii Write lock bits. Set bits = “0” to
program lock bits. See Table 17-1 on
page 103 for details.
109
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Note: a = address high bits, b = address low bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data ou t, i = d ata in, x = don’t care
17.7 High-Voltage Serial Programming
This section describes h ow to program and veri fy Flash Program memo ry, EEPROM Data mem-
ory, lock bits and fuse bits in the ATtiny13A.
Figure 17-2. High-voltage Serial Programming
Read Fuse Byte 0101 H000 0000 H000 xxxx xxxx oooo oooo
Read fuse low/high byte. Bit “0” =
programmed, “1” = unprogrammed.
See “Fuse Bytes” on page 104 for
details.
Write Fuse Byte 1010 1100 1010 H000 xxxx xxxx iiii iiii Set fuse low/high byte. Set bit to “0” to
program, “1” to unprogram. See “Fuse
Bytes” on page 104 for details.
Read Signature Byte 0011 0000 000x xxxx xxxx xxbb oooo oooo Read Signature Byte o at address b.
Read Calibration Byte 0011 1000 000x xxxx 0000 000b oooo oooo Read Calibration Byte. See
“Calibration Bytes” on page 105
Poll RDY/BSY 1111 0000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxoIf o = “1”, a programming operation is
still busy. Wait until this bit returns to
“0” before applying another command.
Table 17-9. Serial Programming Instruction Set (Continued)
Instruction
Instruction Format
OperationByte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte4
VCC
GND
SDO
SII
SDI
(RESET)
+1.8 - 5.5V
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB5
+11.5 - 12.5V
PB3
SCI
110 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
The minimum period for the Serial Clock Input (SCI) during High-voltage Serial Programming is
220 ns.
17.7.1 High-Voltage Serial Programming Algorithm
To program and verify the ATtiny13A in the High-voltage Serial Programming mode, the follow-
ing sequence is recommended (See instruction formats in Table 17-13 on page 111):
The following algorithm pu ts the device in High-voltage Serial Programming mode:
1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 17-11 to “000”, RESET pin to “0” and Vcc to 0V.
2. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between VCC and GND. Ensure that Vcc reaches at least 1.8V within
the next 20 µs.
3. Wait 20 - 60 µs, and apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET.
4. Keep the Prog_enable pins unchanged for at least 10µs after the High-voltage has
been applied to ensure the Prog_enable Signature has been latched.
5. Release the Prog_enable[2] pin to avoid drive contention on the Prog_enable[2]/SDO
pin.
6. Wait at least 300µs before giving any serial instructions on SDI/SII.
7. Exit Programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V.
If the rise time of the Vcc is unable to fulfill the requirements listed above, the following alterna-
tive algorithm can be used.
1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 17-11 to “000”, RESET pin to “0” and Vcc to 0V.
2. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V be twe e n VCC and GN D.
3. Monitor Vcc, and as soon as Vcc reaches 0.9 - 1.1V, apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET.
4. Keep the Prog_enable pin s unchanged for at least 10µs after theHigh-vo ltage has been
applied to ensure the Prog_enable Signature has been latched.
5. Release the Prog_enable[2] pin to avoid drive contention on the Prog_enable[2]/SDO
pin.
Table 17-10. Pin Name Mapping
Signal Name in High-voltage
Serial Programming Mode Pin Name I/O Function
SDI PB0 I Serial Data Input
SII PB1 I Serial Instruction Input
SDO PB2 O Serial Data Output
SCI PB3 I Serial Clock Input (min. 220ns period)
Table 17-11. Pin Values Used to Enter Programmin g Mode
Pin Symbol Value
SDI Prog_enable[0] 0
SII Prog_enable[1] 0
SDO Prog_enable[2] 0
111
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
6. Wait until Vcc actually reaches 4.5 - 5.5V before giving any serialinstructions on
SDI/SII.
7. Exit Programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V.
17.7.2 High-Voltage Serial Programming Instruction set
The instruction set is described in Table 17-13.
Table 17-12. High-voltage Reset Characteristics
Supply Voltage RESET Pin High-voltage Threshold Minimum High-voltage Period for
Latching Prog_enable
VCC VHVRST tHVRST
4.5V 12V 100 ns
5.5V 12 1 00 ns
Table 17-13. High -Voltage Serial Programming Instruction Set for ATtiny13A
Instruction
Instruction Format
Operation Rema rksInstr.1/5 Instr.2/6 Instr.3 Instr.4
Chip Erase SDI
SII
SDO
0_1000_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr.3 until SDO goes
high for the Chip Erase cycle to
finish.
Load “Write
Flash”
Command
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0001_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx Enter Flash Programming code.
Load Flash
Page Buffer
SDI
SII
SDO
0_ bbbb_bbbb _00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_eeee_eeee_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_dddd_dddd_00
0_0011_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1101_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Repeat after Instr. 1 - 5 until the
entire page buffer is filled or until all
data within the page is filled. See
Note 1.
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx Instr 5.
Load Flash High
Address and
Program Page
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_000a_00
0_0001_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr 3 until SDO goes
high. Repeat Instr. 2 - 3 for each
loaded Flash Page until the entire
Flash or all data is programmed.
Repeat Instr. 1 for a new 256 byte
page. See Note 1.
Load “Read
Flash”
Command
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0010_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx Enter Flash Read mode.
Read Flash Low
and High Bytes
SDI
SII
SDO
0_bbbb_bbbb_00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_000a_00
0_0001_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
q_qqqq_qqqx_xx
Repeat Instr. 1, 3 - 6 for each new
address. Repeat Instr. 2 for a new
256 byte page.
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1100_00
p_pppp_pppx_xx Instr 5 - 6.
Load “Write
EEPROM”
Command
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0001_0001_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Enter EEPROM Programming
mode.
112 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Load EEPROM
Page Buffer
SDI
SII
SDO
0_00bb_bbbb_00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_eeee_eeee_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1101_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Repeat Instr. 1 - 4 until the entire
page buffer is filled or until all data
within the page is filled. See Note
2.
Program
EEPROM Page
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr. 2 until SDO goes
high. Repeat Instr. 1 - 2 for each
loaded EEPROM page until the
entire EEPROM or all data is
programmed.
Write EEPROM
Byte
SDI
SII
SDO
0_00bb_bbbb_00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_eeee_eeee_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1101_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Repeat Instr. 1 - 5 for each new
address. Wait after Instr. 5 until
SDO goes high. See Note 3.
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx Instr. 5
Load “Read
EEPROM”
Command
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0011_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx Enter EEPROM Read mode.
Read EEPROM
Byte
SDI
SII
SDO
0_bbbb_bbbb_00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_aaaa_aaaa_00
0_0001_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
q_qqqq_qqq0_00
Repeat Instr. 1, 3 - 4 for each new
address. Repeat Instr. 2 for a new
256 byte page.
Write Fuse Low
Bits
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0100_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_A987_6543_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO goes
high. Write A - 3 = “0” to program
the Fuse bit.
Write Fuse High
Bits
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0100_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_000F_EDCB_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO goes
high. Write F - B = “0” to program
the Fuse bit.
Write Lock Bits SDI
SII
SDO
0_0010_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0021_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO goes
high. Write 2 - 1 = “0” to program
the Lock Bit.
Read Fuse Low
Bits
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0100_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
A_9876_543x_xx
Reading A - 3 = “0” means the
Fuse bit is programmed.
Read Fuse High
Bits
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0100_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1010_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1110_00
x_xxFE_DCBx_xx
Reading F - B = “0” means the fuse
bit is programmed.
Read Lock Bits SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0100_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1100_00
x_xxxx_x21x_xx
Reading 2, 1 = “0” means the lock
bit is programmed.
Table 17-13. High -Voltage Serial Programming Instruction Set for ATtiny13A (Continued)
Instruction
Instruction Format
Operation Rema rksInstr.1/5 Instr.2/6 Instr.3 Instr.4
113
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Note: a = address high bits, b = address low bits, d = dat a in high bits, e = dat a in low bits, p = data out high bits, q = dat a out low bits,
x = don’t care, 1 = Lock Bit1, 2 = Lock Bit2, 3 = CKSEL0 fuse, 4 = CKSEL1 fuse, 5 = SUT0 fuse, 6 = SUT1 fuse, 7 = CKDIV8,
fuse, 8 = WDTON fuse, 9 = EESAVE fuse, A = SPIEN fuse, B = RSTDISBL fuse, C = BODLEVEL0 fuse, D= BODLEVEL1 fuse,
E = MONEN fuse, F = SELFPRGEN fuse
Note: The EEPROM is written page-wise. But only the bytes that are loaded into the page are actually written to the EEPROM. Page-
wise EEPROM access is more efficient when multiple bytes are to be written to the same page. Note that auto-erase of
EEPROM is not available in High-voltage Serial Programming, only in SPI Programming.
17.8 Considerations for Efficient Programming
The loaded command and address are retained in the device during programming. For efficient
programming, the following should be considered.
The command needs only be loaded once when writing or reading multiple memory
locations.
Skip writing the data value 0xFF that is the contents of the entire EEPROM (unless the
EESAVE fuse is programmed) and Flash after a Chip Erase.
Address High byte needs only be loaded before programming or reading a new 256 word
window in Flash or 256 byte EEPROM. This consideration also applies to Signature bytes
reading.
17.8.1 Chip Erase The Chip Erase will erase the Flash and EEPROM(1) memories plus lock bits. The lock bits are
not reset until the Prog ram memor y has been completely er ased. The fuse bits are not cha nged.
A Chip Erase must be performed before the Flash and/or EEPROM are re-programmed.
1. Load command “Chip Erase” (see Table 17-13 on page 111).
2. Wait after Instr. 3 until SDO goes high for the “Chip Erase” cycle to finish.
3. Load Command “No Operation”.
Note: 1. The EEPROM memory is preserved during Chip Erase if the EESAVE fuse is programmed.
Read Signature
Bytes
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_1000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_00bb_00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
q_qqqq_qqqx_xx
Repeats Instr 2 4 for each
signature byte address.
Read
Calibration Byte
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_1000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_000b_00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1100_00
p_pppp_pppx_xx
Load “No
Operation”
Command
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Table 17-13. High -Voltage Serial Programming Instruction Set for ATtiny13A (Continued)
Instruction
Instruction Format
Operation Rema rksInstr.1/5 Instr.2/6 Instr.3 Instr.4
114 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
17.8.2 Programming the Flash
The Flash is organized in pages, see Table 17-9 on page 108. When programming the Flash,
the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of program data to be pro-
grammed simultaneously. The following procedure describes how to program the entire Flash
memory:
1. Load Command “Write Flash” (see Table 17-13 on page 111).
2. Load Flash Page Buffer.
3. Load Flash High Address an d Program Page. W ait af ter Instr. 3 until SDO goes h igh for
the “Page Programming” cycle to finish.
4. Repeat 2 through 3 until the entire Flash is programmed or until all data has been
programmed.
5. End Page Programming by Loading Command “No Operation”.
When writing or reading serial data to th e ATtiny13A, data is cloc ked on the rising edg e of the
serial clock, see Figure 17-4 on page 115, Figure 18-5 on page 123 and Table 18-10 on page
123 for details.
Figure 17-3. Addressing the Flash which is Organized in Pages
PROGRAM MEMORY
WORD ADDRESS
WITHIN A PAGE
PAGE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE FLASH
INSTRUCTION WORD
PA G E PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]:
00
01
02
PAGEEND
PA G E
PCWORDPCPAGE
PCMSB PAGEMSB
PROGRAM
COUNTER
115
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 17-4. High-voltage Serial Programming Waveforms
17.8.3 Programming the EEPROM
The EEPROM is organized in pages, see Table 18-9 on page 122. When programming the
EEPROM, the data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of data to be pro-
grammed simultaneously. The programming algo rithm for the EEPROM Data memory is as
follows (refer to Table 17-13 on page 111):
1. Load Command “Write EEPROM”.
2. Load EEPROM Page Buffer.
3. Program EEPROM Page. Wait after Instr. 2 until SDO goes high for the “Page Pro-
gramming” cycle to finish.
4. Repeat 2 through 3 until the entire EEPROM is programmed or until all data has been
programmed.
5. End Page Programming by Loading Command “No Operation”.
17.8.4 Reading the Flash
The algorithm for reading the Flash memory is as follows (refer to Table 17-13 on page 111):
1. Load Command "Read Flash".
2. Read Flash Low and High Bytes. The contents at the selected addre ss are available at
serial output SDO.
17.8.5 Reading the EEPROM
The algorithm for reading the EEPROM memory is as follows (refer to Table 17-13 on page
111):
1. Load Command “Read EEPROM”.
2. Read EEPROM Byte. The contents at the selected address are available at serial out-
put SDO.
17.8.6 Programming and Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits
The algorithms for programming and reading the fuse low/high bits and lock bits are shown in
Table 17-13 on page 111.
MSB
MSB
MSB LSB
LSB
LSB
012345678910
SDI
PB0
SII
PB1
SDO
PB2
SCI
PB3
116 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
17.8.7 Reading the Signature Bytes and Calibration Byte
The algorithms for readin g the Signature bytes a nd Calibration byte ar e shown in Table 1 7-13 on
page 111.
17.8.8 Power-off sequence
Set SCI to “0”. Set RESET to “1”. Turn VCC powe r off .
117
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
18. Electrical Characteristics
18.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings*
18.2 DC Characteristics
Operating Temperature................. ... .............. -55°C to +125°C*NOTICE: Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute
Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent dam-
age to the device. This is a stress rating only and
functional operation of the device at these or
other conditions beyond those indicated in the
operational sections of this specification is not
implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating
conditions for extended periods may affect
device reliability.
Storage Temperature..................................... -65°C to +150°C
Voltage on any Pin except RESET
with respect to Ground ................................-0.5V to VCC+0.5V
Voltage on RESET with respect to Ground......-0.5V to +13.0V
Maximum Operating Voltage ............................................ 6.0V
DC Current per I/O Pin............................................... 40.0 mA
DC Current VCC and GND Pins................................ 200.0 mA
Table 18-1. DC Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ(1) Max Units
VIL
Input Low Voltage,
Any Pin as I/O VCC = 1.8 - 2.4V -0.5 0.2VCC(2) V
VCC = 2.4 - 5.5V -0.5 0.3VCC(2) V
Input Low Voltage,
RESET Pin as Reset (4) VCC = 1.8 - 5.5 -0.5 0.2VCC(2) V
VIH
Input High Voltage,
Any Pin as I/O VCC = 1.8 - 2.4V 0.7VCC(3) VCC + 0.5 V
VCC = 2.4 - 5.5V 0.6VCC(3) VCC + 0.5 V
Input High Voltage,
RESET Pin as Reset (4) VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V 0.9VCC(3) VCC + 0.5 V
VOL
Output Low Voltage,
Pins PB0 and PB1 (5) IOL = 20 mA, VCC = 5V 0.8 V
IOL = 10 mA, VCC = 3V 0.6 V
Output Low Voltage,
Pins PB2, PB3 and PB4 (5) IOL = 10 mA, VCC = 5V 0.8 V
IOL = 5 mA, VCC = 3V 0.6 V
VOH
Output High Voltage,
Pins PB0 and PB1 (6) IOH = -20 mA, VCC = 5V 4.0 V
IOH = -10 mA, VCC = 3V 2.3 V
Output High Voltage,
Pins PB2, PB3 and PB4 (6) IOH = -10 mA, VCC = 5V 4.2 V
IOH = -5 mA, VCC = 3V 2.5 V
ILIL Input Leakage
Current I/O Pin VCC = 5.5V, pin low -1 1 µA
ILIH Input Leakage
Current I/O Pin VCC = 5.5V, pin high -1 1 µA
RPU Pull-Up Resistor, I/O Pin VCC = 5.5V, inpu t low 20 50 kΩ
Pull-Up Resistor, Reset Pin VCC = 5.5V, input low 30 80 kΩ
118 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Notes: 1. Typical values at +25°C.
2. “Max” means the highest value where the pin is guara nteed to be read as low.
3. “Min” means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high.
4. Not tested in production.
5. Although each I/O port can under non-transient, steady state conditions sink more than the test conditions, the sum of all IOL
(for all ports) should not exceed 6 0 mA. If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are
not guaranteed to sink current greater than the listed test condition.
6. Although each I/O port can under non-transient, steady state conditions source more than the test conditions, the sum of all
IOH (for all ports) should not exceed 60 mA. If IOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins
are not guaranteed to source current greater than the listed test condition.
7. Values are with external clock using methods described in “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 32. Powe r Reduction
is enabled (PRR = 0xFF) and there is no I/O drive.
8. BOD Disabled.
18.3 Speed The maximum operating frequency of the device depends on supply voltag e, VCC. As shown in
Figure 18-1, the relation sh ip be tween ma xim um fre que ncy and VCC is linear in the range of 1.8V
to 4.5V.
Figure 18-1. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC
ICC
Supply Current,
Active Mode (7)
f = 1MHz, VCC = 2V 0.2 0.35 mA
f = 4MHz, VCC = 3V 1.2 1.8 mA
f = 8MHz, VCC = 5V 3.6 6 mA
Supply Current,
Idle Mode (7)
f = 1MHz, VCC = 2V 0.03 0.2 mA
f = 4MHz, VCC = 3V 0.2 1 mA
f = 8MHz, VCC = 5V 0.7 3 mA
Supply Current,
Power-Down Mode (8) WDT ena bled, VCC = 3V 3.9 10 µA
WDT disabled, V CC = 3V 0.15 2 µA
Table 18-1. DC Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C (Continued)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ(1) Max Units
4 MHz
1.8V 5.5V
4.5V
20 MHz
119
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
18.4 Clock Characteristics
18.4.1 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator Accuracy
It is possible to manually calibrate the internal oscillator to be more accurate than default factory
calibration. Note that the oscillator frequency depends on temperature and voltage. Voltage and
temperature characteristics can b e found in Figure 19-59 on page 154, Fig ure 19-60 on page
154, Figure 19-61 on page 155, Figure 19- 62 on pa ge 155 , Figure 19-63 on page 156, and Fig-
ure 19-64 on page 156.
Notes: 1. Accuracy of oscillator frequency at cal ibration point (fixed temperature and fixed voltage).
18.4.2 External Clock Drive
Figure 18-2. External Clock Drive Waveform
Table 18-2. Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator
Calibration
Method Target Frequency VCC Temperature Accuracy at given V oltage
& Temperature(1)
Factory
Calibration 4.8 / 9.6 M H z 3V 25°10%
User
Calibration
Fixed frequency within:
4 – 5 MHz / 8 – 10 MHz Fixed voltage within:
1.8 – 5.5V
Fixed temperat ure
within:
-40°C to +85°C±2%
VIL1
VIH1
Table 18-3. External Clock Drive
Symbol Parameter
VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V VCC = 4.5 - 5.5V
UnitsMin. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
1/tCLCL Clock Frequency 0 4 0 10 0 20 MHz
tCLCL Clock Period 250 100 50 ns
tCHCX High Time 100 40 20 ns
tCLCX Low Time 100 40 20 ns
tCLCH Rise Time 2.0 1.6 0.5 µs
tCHCL Fall Time 2.0 1.6 0.5 µs
ΔtCLCL Change in period from one clock cycle to the next 2 2 2 %
120 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
18.5 System and Reset Characteristics
Note: 1. When RESET pin used as reset (not as I/O).
2. Not tested in production.
18.5.1 Enhanced Power-On Reset
Note: 1. Values are guidelines only.
2. Threshold where device is released from reset whe n voltage is rising.
3. The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOA.
18.5.2 Brown-Out Detection
Note: 1. VBOT may be below nominal minimum operating voltage for some devices. For devices where
this is the case, the device is tested down to VCC = VBOT during the production test. This guar-
antees that a Brown-out Reset will occur before VCC drops to a voltage where correct
operation of the microcontroller is no longer guaranteed.
Table 18-4. Reset, Brown-out, and Internal Voltage Characteristics
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
VRST RESET Pin Threshold
Voltage 0.2 VCC 0.9VCC V
tRST Minimum pulse width on
RESET Pin (1)
VCC = 1.8V
VCC = 3V
VCC = 5V
2000
700
400
2500
2500
2500 ns
VHYST Brown-out Detector
Hysteresis (2) 50 mV
tBOD Min Pulse Width on
Brown-out Reset (2) s
VBG Internal bandgap reference
voltage VCC = 5V
TA= 25°C 1.0 1.1 1.2 V
tBG Internal bandgap reference
start-up time (2) VCC = 5V
TA= 25°C 40 70 µs
IBG Internal bandgap reference
current consumption (2) VCC = 5V
TA= 25°C 15 µA
Table 18-5. Characteristics of Enhanced Power-On Reset. TA = -40 to +85°C
Symbol Parameter Min(1) Typ(1) Max(1) Units
VPOR Release threshold of power-on reset (2) 1.1 1.4 1.6 V
VPOA Activation threshold of power-on reset (3) 0.6 1.3 1.6 V
SRON Power-On Slope Rate 0.01 V/ms
Table 18-6. VBOT vs. BODLEVEL Fuse Coding
BODLEVEL[1:0] Fuses Min(1) Typ(1) Max(1) Units
11 BOD Disabled
10 1.7 1.8 2.0
V01 2.5 2.7 2.9
00 4.1 4.3 4.5
121
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
18.6 Analog Comparator Characteristics
Note: All parameters are based on simulation results.
18.7 ADC Characteristics
Table 18-7. Analog Comparator Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
VAIO Input Offset Voltage VCC = 5V, VIN = VCC / 2 < 10 40 mV
ILAC Input Leakage Current VCC = 5V, VIN = VCC / 2 -50 50 nA
tAPD
Analog Propagation Delay
(from saturation to slight overdrive) VCC = 2.7V 750
ns
VCC = 4.0V 500
Analog Propagation Delay
(large step chang e) VCC = 2.7V 100
VCC = 4.0V 75
tDPD Digital Propagation Delay VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V 1 2 CLK
Table 18-8. ADC Characteristics, Single Ended Channels. TA = -40°C to +85°C
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
Resolution 10 Bits
Absolute accuracy
(Including INL, DNL, and
Quantization, Gain and Offset
Errors)
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 3LSB
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 1 MHz 4LSB
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz,
Noise Reduction Mode 2.5 LSB
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 1 MHz,
Noise Reduction Mode 3.5 LSB
Integral Non-Linearity (INL)
(Accuracy after Offset and
Gain Calibration)
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 1LSB
Differential Non-linearity
(DNL) VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 0.5 LSB
Gain Error VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 3.5 LSB
Offset Error VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 2.5 LSB
Conversion Time Free Running Conversion 13 260 µs
Clock Frequency 50 1000 kHz
VIN Input Voltage GND VREF V
Input Bandwidth 38.5 kHz
VINT Internal Voltage Reference 1.0 1.1 1.2 V
RAIN Analog Input Resistance 100 MΩ
122 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
18.8 Serial Programming Characteristics
Figure 18-3. Serial Programming Timing
Figure 18-4. Serial Programming Waveform
Note: 1. 2 tCLCL for fck < 12 MHz, 3 tCLCL for fck >= 12 MHz
Table 18-9. Seri al Programming Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency VCC = 1.8 – 5.5V 01MHz
tCLCL Oscillator Period 1000 ns
1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency VCC = 2.7 – 5.5V 09.6MHz
tCLCL Oscillator Period 104 ns
1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency VCC = 4.5 – 5.5V 020MHz
tCLCL Oscillator Period 50 ns
tSHSL SCK Pulse Width High
VCC = 1.8 – 5.5V
2 tCLCL(1) ns
tSLSH SCK Pulse Width Low 2 tCLCL(1) ns
tOVSH MOSI Setup to SCK High tCLCL ns
tSHOX MOSI Hold after SCK High 2 tCLCL ns
MOSI
MISO
SCK
t
OVSH
t
SHSL
t
SLSH
t
SHOX
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
SERIAL CLOCK INPUT
(SCK)
SERIAL DATA INPUT
(MOSI)
(MISO)
SAMPLE
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT
123
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
18.9 High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics
Figure 18-5. High-voltage Serial Programming Timing
Table 18-10. High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics
TA = 25°C, VCC = 5.0V ± 10% (Unless otherwise noted)
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
tSHSL SCI (PB3) Pulse Width High 110 ns
tSLSH SCI (PB3) Pulse Width Low 110 ns
tIVSH SDI (PB0), SII (PB1) Valid to SCI (PB3) High 50 ns
tSHIX SDI (PB0), SII (PB1) Hold after SCI (PB3) High 50 ns
tSHOV SCI (PB3) High to SDO (PB2) Valid 16 ns
tWLWH_PFB Wait after Instr. 3 for Write Fuse Bits 2.5 m s
SDI (PB0), SII (PB1)
SDO (PB2)
SCI (PB3)
t
IVSH
t
SHSL
t
SLSH
t
SHIX
t
SHOV
124 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
19. Typical Characteristics
The data contained in this section is largely based on simulations and characterization of similar
devices in the same process and design methods. Thus, the data should be treated as indica-
tions of how the part will behave.
The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing.
During characterisation devices are operated at frequencies higher than test limits but they are
not guarante ed to function properly at frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates.
All current con sumption m easur ement s are per formed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and
with internal p ull-ups enabled . Curren t consump tion is a function o f several factor s such as oper-
ating voltage, operating frequency, loading of I/O pins, switching rate of I/O pins, code executed
and ambient temperature. The dominating factors are operating voltage and frequency.
A sine wave generator with rail-to-rail output is used as clock source but current consumption in
Power-Down mode is independent of clock selection. The difference be twee n curr ent co nsum p-
tion in Power-Down mode with Watchdog Timer enabled and Power-Down mode with Wa tchdog
Timer disabled represents the differential current drawn by the Watchdog Timer.
The current dr awn from pins with a capacitive load may be estimated (for one pin) as follows:
where VCC = operating voltage, CL = load capacitance and fSW = average switching frequency of
I/O pin.
19.1 Supply Current of I/O Modules
Using Table 19-1, the typical characteristics of this section and the equation given one can cal-
culate the additional current consumption for peripheral modules in active and idle mode.
Peripheral modules are enabled and disabled via control bits in the Power Reduction Register.
See “Power Reduction Register” on page 31 for details.
19.1.1 Example Estimate current consumption in idle mode, with Tim er/Counter0 and ADC enabled, the device
running at 2V and with 1MHz external clock.
From Figure 19-7 on page 128 we find idle supply current ICC = 0.03 mA. Using Figure 19-18 on
page 133 we find ADC supply current IADC = 0.18 mA, and using Table 19-1 we find
Timer/Counter0 supply current ITC0 = 0.004 mA. The total current consumption in idle mode is
therefore ICCTOT = 0.214 mA, approximatel y 0.21 mA.
ICP VCC CLf×× SW
Table 19-1. Add itional Current Consumption (Absolute) for Peripherals
PRR bit
Typical numbers
VCC = 2V, f = 1MHz VCC = 3V, f = 4MHz VCC = 5V, f = 8MHz
PRTIM0 4 µA 25 µA 115 µA
PRADC 180 µA 260 µA 460 µA
125
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
19.2 Current Consumption in Active Mode
Figure 19-1. Active Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz)
Figure 19-2. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20 MHz)
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. LOW FREQUENCY
(PRR=0xFF)
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. FREQUENCY
(PRR=0xFF)
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
0 2 4 6 8 101214161820
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
126 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-3. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 9.6 MHz)
Figure 19-4. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 4.8 MHz)
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 9.6 MHz
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 4.8 MHz
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
127
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-5. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal WDT Oscillator, 128 kHz)
Figure 19-6. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (32 kHz External Clock)
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
INTERNAL WD OSCILLATOR, 128 KHz
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
32 KHz EXTERNAL CLOCK, PRR = 0xFF
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.005
0.01
0.015
0.02
0.025
0.03
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
128 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
19.3 Current Consumption in Idle Mode
Figure 19-7. Idle Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz)
Figure 19-8. Idle Supply Current vs. Fr eq ue n cy (1 - 20 MH z )
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. LOW FREQUENCY
(PRR=0xFF)
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. FREQUENCY
(PRR=0xFF)
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
0 2 4 6 8 101214161820
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
1.8 V
129
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-9. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 9.6 MHz)
Figure 19-10. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 4.8 MHz)
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. V
CC
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 9.6 MHz
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 4.8 MHz
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
130 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-11. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128 kHz)
Figure 19-12. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (32 kHz External Clock)
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
INTERNAL WD OSCILLATOR, 128 KHz
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.005
0.01
0.015
0.02
0.025
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. V
CC
32 KHz EXTERNAL OSCILLATOR, PRR=0xFF
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.001
0.002
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.006
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
131
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
19.4 Current Consumption in Power-down Mode
Figure 19-13. Power-down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled)
Figure 19-14. Power-down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Enabled)
POWER-DOWN SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
POWER-DOWN SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
WATCHDOG TIMER ENABLED
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (uA)
132 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
19.5 Current Consumption in Reset
Figure 19-15. Reset Supply Current vs. VCC (0.1 - 1.0 MHz, Excluding Current through the
Reset Pull-up)
Figure 19-16. Reset Supply Current vs. VCC (1 - 20 MHz, Excluding Current through the Reset
Pull-up)
RESET SUPPLY CURRENT vs. V
CC
EXCLUDING CURRENT THROUGH THE RESET PULLUP
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
RESET SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
EXCLUDING CURRENT THROUGH THE RESET PULLUP
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
0 2 4 6 8 101214161820
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
133
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
19.6 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units
Figure 19-17. Brownout Detector Current vs. VCC
Figure 19-18. ADC Current vs. VCC
BROWNOUT DETECTOR CURRENT vs. VCC
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (uA)
ADC CURRENT vs. V
CC
f = 1.0 MHz
-40 °C
25 °C
85 °C
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (uA)
134 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-19. Analog Comparator Current vs. VCC
Figure 19-20. Programming Current vs. VCC
ANALOG COMPARATOR CURRENT vs. VCC
f = 1.0 MHz
-40 °C
25 °C
85 °C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (uA)
PROGRAMMING CURRENT vs. VCC
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (uA)
135
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
19.7 Pull-up Resistors
Figure 19-21. Pull-up Re sist or Curr en t vs. In put Voltage (I/O Pin, VCC = 1.8V)
Figure 19-22. Pull-up Re sist or Curr en t vs. In put Voltage (I/O Pin, VCC = 3V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE
VCC = 1.8V
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2
VOP (V)
IOP (uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE
VCC = 3V
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
00,511,522,533,5
VOP (V)
IOP (uA)
136 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-23. Pull-up Re sist or Curr en t vs. In put Voltage (I/O Pin, VCC = 5V)
Figure 19-24. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE
VCC = 5V
85 °C 25 °C
-40 °C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
0123456
VOP (V)
IOP (uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE
VCC = 1.8V
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2
V
RESET
(V)
I
RESET
(uA)
137
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-25. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 3V)
Figure 19-26. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 5V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE
VCC = 3V
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5
VRESET (V)
IRESET (uA)
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE
V
CC
= 5V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
0123456
V
RESET
(V)
I
RESET
(uA)
138 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
19.8 Output Driver Strength (Low Power Pins)
Figure 19-27. VOH: I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (Low Power Pins, VCC = 1.8V)
Figure 19-28. VOH: I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (Low Power Pins, VCC = 3V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
LOW POWER PINS, VCC = 1.8V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
LOW POWER PINS, VCC = 3V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
012345678910
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)
139
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-29. VOH: I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (Low Power Pins, VCC = 5V)
Figure 19-30. VOL: I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (Low Power Pins, V CC = 1.8V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
LOW POWER PINS, V
CC
= 5V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
4
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5
5.2
0 2 4 6 8 101214161820
I
OH
(mA)
V
OH
(V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
LOW POWER PINS, VCC = 1.8V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)
140 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-31. VOL: I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (Low Power Pins, V CC = 3V)
Figure 19-32. VOL: I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (Low Power Pins, V CC = 5V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
LOW POWER PINS, VCC = 3V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
012345678910
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
LOW POWER PINS, V
CC
= 5V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
02468101214161820
I
OL
(mA)
V
OL
(V)
141
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
19.9 Output Driver Strength (Regular Pins)
Figure 19-33. VOH: I/O Pin Output Volt age vs. Source Current (VCC = 1.8V)
Figure 19-34. VOH: I/O Pin Output Volt age vs. Source Current (VCC = 3V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
VCC = 1.8V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2
0123456
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
VCC = 3V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
1.5
1.7
1.9
2.1
2.3
2.5
2.7
2.9
3.1
012345678910
I
OH
(mA)
V
OH
(V)
142 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-35. VOH: I/O Pin Output Volt age vs. Source Current (VCC = 5V)
Figure 19-36. VOL: I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 1.8V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
VCC = 5V
4
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5
5.2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
VCC = 1.8V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
0123456
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)
143
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-37. VOL: I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 3V)
Figure 19-38. VOL: I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 5V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
V
CC
= 3V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
012345678910
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
VCC = 5V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0 2 4 6 8 101214161820
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)
144 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-39. VOH: Reset Pin as I/O, Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 1.8V)
Figure 19-40. VOH: Reset Pin as I/O, Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 3V)
RESET AS I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
VCC = 1.8V
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,2
1,4
1,6
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
RESET AS I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
VCC = 3V
0
0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)
145
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-41. VOH: Reset Pin as I/O, Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 5V)
Figure 19-42. VOL: Reset Pin as I/O, Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 1.8V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
RESET AS I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
VCC = 5V
0
0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
RESET AS I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
VCC = 1.8V
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)
146 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-43. VOL: Reset Pin as I/O, Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 3V)
Figure 19-44. VOL: Reset Pin as I/O, Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 5V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
RESET AS I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
VCC = 3V
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,2
1,4
1,6
0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
RESET AS I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
VCC = 5V
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,2
1,4
1,6
00,511,522,533,544,55
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)
147
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
19.10 Input Thresholds and Hysteresis (for I/O Ports)
Figure 19-45. VIH: Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (I/O Pin, Read as '1')
Figure 19-46. VIL: Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (I/O Pin, Read as '0')
I/O PIN INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC
V
IH
, I/O PIN READ AS '1'
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Threshold (V)
I/O PIN INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC
VIL, I/O PIN READ AS '0'
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)
148 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-47. VIH-VIL: Input Hysteresis vs. VCC (I/O Pin)
Figure 19-48. VIH: Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (Reset Pin as I/O, Read as '1')
I/O PIN INPUT HYSTERESIS vs. VCC
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Input Hysteresis (V)
RESET PIN AS I/O THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC
VIH, RESET READ AS '1'
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Threshold (V)
149
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-49. VIL: Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (Reset Pin as I/O, Read as '0')
Figure 19-50. VIH-VIL: Input Hysteresis vs. VCC (Reset Pin as I/O)
RESET PIN AS I/O THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC
V
IL
, RESET READ AS '0'
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Threshold (V)
RESET PIN AS IO, INPUT HYSTERESIS vs. VCC
VIL , I/O PIN READ AS "0"
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Input Hysteresis (V)
150 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
19.11 BOD, Bandgap and Reset
Figure 19-51. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 4.3V)
Figure 19-52. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 2.7V)
BOD THRESHOLDS vs. TEMPERATURE
BODLEVEL = 4.3V
VCC RISING
VCC FALLING
4.2
4.25
4.3
4.35
4.4
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature (C)
Threshold (V)
VCC RISING
VCC FALLING
BOD THRESHOLDS vs. TEMPERATURE
BODLEVEL = 2.7V
2.6
2.65
2.7
2.75
2.8
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature (C)
Threshold (V)
151
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-53. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 1.8V)
Figure 19-54. Bandgap Voltage vs. VCC
VCC RISING
VCC FALLING
BOD THRESHOLDS vs. TEMPERATURE
BODLEVEL = 1.8V
1.7
1.75
1.8
1.85
1.9
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature (C)
Threshold (V)
BANDGAP VOLTAGE vs. VCC
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
1.06
1.08
1.1
1.12
1.14
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
Vcc (V)
Bandgap Voltage (V)
152 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-55. VIH: Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (Reset Pin Read as '1')
Figure 19-56. VIL: Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (Reset Pin Read as '0')
RESET INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC
VIH, I/O PIN READ AS '1'
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)
RESET INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC
V
IL
, I/O PIN READ AS '0'
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)
153
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-57. VIH-VIL: Reset Input Pin Hysteresis vs. VCC
Figure 19-58. Minimum Reset Pulse Width vs. VCC
RESET PIN INPUT HYSTERESIS vs. VCC
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Input Hysteresis (V)
MINIMUM RESET PULSE WIDTH vs. VCC
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
500
1000
1500
2000
0123456
VCC (V)
Pulsewidth (ns)
154 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
19.12 Internal Oscillator Speed
Figure 19-59. Calibrated 9.6 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature
Figure 19-60. Calibrated 9.6 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC
CALIBRATED 9.6MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE
5.5 V
4.5 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature (C)
Frequency (MHz)
CALIBRATED 9.6MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OPERATING VOLTAGE
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
9
9.2
9.4
9.6
9.8
10
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Frequency (MHz)
155
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-61. Calibrated 9.6 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Osccal Value
Figure 19-62. Calibrated 4.8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature
CALIBRATED 9.6MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OSCCAL VALUE
VCC = 3V
25 °C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
0 163248648096112
OSCCAL
Frequency (MHz)
CALIBRATED 4.8MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE
5.5 V
4.0 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature
Frequency (MHz)
156 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-63. Calibrated 4.8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC
Figure 19-64. Calibrated 4.8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Osccal Value
CALIBRATED 4.8MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OPERATING VOLTAGE
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5
5.2
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Frequency (MHz)
CALIBRATED 4.8MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OSCCAL VALUE
VCC = 3V
25 °C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0 163248648096112
OSCCAL
Frequency (MHz)
157
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Figure 19-65. 128 kHz Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC
Figure 19-66. 128 kHz Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature
WATCHDOG OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OPERATING VOLTAGE
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
100000
102000
104000
106000
108000
110000
112000
114000
116000
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Frequency (Hz)
WATCHDOG OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE
5.5 V
4.0 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
105000
106000
107000
108000
109000
110000
111000
112000
113000
114000
115000
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature
Frequency (kH)
158 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
20. Register Summary
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page
0x3F SREG I T H S V N Z C page 9
0x3E Reserved
0x3D SPL SP[7:0] page 11
0x3C Reserved
0x3B GIMSK INT0 PCIE page 47
0x3A GIFR INTF0 PCIF pa ge 48
0x39 TIMSK0 OCIE0B OCIE0A TOIE0 page 75
0x38 TIFR0 OCF0B OCF0A TOV0 page 76
0x37 SPMCSR CTPB RFLB PGWRT PGERS SELFPR- page 98
0x36 OCR0A Timer/Counter – Output Compare Register A page 75
0x35 MCUCR –PUDSESM1SM0 ISC01 ISC00 pages 33, 47, 57
0x34 MCUSR WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF page 42
0x33 TCCR0B FOC0A FOC0B WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00 page 73
0x32 TCNT0 Timer/Counter (8-bit) page 74
0x31 OSCCAL Oscillator Calibration Register page 27
0x30 BODCR BODS BODSE page 33
0x2F TCCR0A COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0 –WGM01WGM00 page 70
0x2E DWDR DWDR[7:0] page 97
0x2D Reserved
0x2C Reserved
0x2B Reserved
0x2A Reserved
0x29 OCR0B Timer/Counter – Output Compare Register B page 75
0x28 GTCCR TSM –––– PSR10 page 78
0x27 Reserved
0x26 CLKPR CLKPCE CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 page 28
0x25 PRR PRTIM0 PRADC page 34
0x24 Reserved
0x23 Reserved
0x22 Reserved
0x21 WDTCR WDTIF WDTIE WDP3 WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 page 42
0x20 Reserved
0x1F Reserved
0x1E EEARL EEPROM Address Register page 20
0x1D EEDR EEPROM Data Register page 20
0x1C EECR EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMPE EEPE EERE page 21
0x1B Reserved
0x1A Reserved
0x19 Reserved
0x18 PORTB PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 page 57
0x17 DDRB DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 page 57
0x16 PINB PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 page 58
0x15 PCMSK PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 page 48
0x14 DIDR0 ADC0D ADC2D ADC3D ADC1D AIN1D AIN0D pages 81, 95
0x13 Reserved
0x12 Reserved
0x11 Reserved
0x10 Reserved
0x0F Reserved
0x0E Reserved
0x0D Reserved
0x0C Reserved
0x0B Reserved
0x0A Reserved
0x09 Reserved
0x08 ACSR ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIS1 ACIS0 page 80
0x07 ADMUX REFS0 ADLAR MUX1 MUX0 page 92
0x06 ADCSRA ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 page 93
0x05 ADCH ADC Data Register High Byte page 94
0x04 ADCL ADC Data Registe r Low Byte page 94
0x03 ADCSRB –ACME ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 pages 80, 95
0x02 Reserved
0x01 Reserved
0x00 Reserved
159
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses
should never be written.
2. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.ome of the Status Flags are
cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVR s, the CBI and SBI instructions will only operation
the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work
with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
160 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
21. Instruction Set Summary
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS
ADD Rd, Rr Add two Registers Rd Rd + Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1
ADC Rd, Rr Add with Carry two Registers Rd Rd + Rr + C Z,C,N,V,H 1
ADIW Rdl,K Add Immediate to Word Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl + K Z,C,N,V,S 2
SUB Rd, Rr Subtract two Registers Rd Rd - Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1
SUBI Rd, K Subtract Constant from Register Rd Rd - K Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBC Rd, Rr Subtract with Carry two Registers Rd Rd - Rr - C Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBCI Rd, K Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg. Rd Rd - K - C Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBIW Rdl,K Subtract Immediate from Word Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl - K Z,C,N,V,S 2
AND Rd, Rr Logical A ND Registers Rd Rd Rr Z,N,V 1
ANDI Rd, K Logical AND Register and Constant Rd Rd K Z,N,V 1
OR Rd, Rr Logical OR Registers Rd Rd v Rr Z,N,V 1
ORI Rd, K Logical OR Register and Constant Rd Rd v K Z,N,V 1
EOR Rd, Rr Exclusive OR Registers Rd Rd Rr Z,N,V 1
COM Rd One’s Complement Rd 0xFF Rd Z,C,N,V 1
NEG Rd Two’s Complement Rd 0x00 Rd Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBR Rd,K Set Bit(s) in Register Rd Rd v K Z,N,V 1
CBR Rd,K Clear Bit(s) in Register Rd Rd (0xFF - K) Z,N,V 1
INC Rd Increment Rd Rd + 1 Z,N,V 1
DEC Rd Decrement Rd Rd 1 Z,N,V 1
TST Rd Test for Zero or M i nus Rd Rd Rd Z,N,V 1
CLR Rd Clear Register Rd Rd Rd Z,N,V 1
SER Rd Set Register Rd 0xFF None 1
BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS
RJMP k Relative Jump PC PC + k + 1 None 2
IJMP Indirect Jump to (Z) PC Z None 2
RCALL k Relative Subroutine Call PC PC + k + 1 None 3
ICALL Indirect Call to (Z) PC ZNone3
RET Subroutine Return PC STACK None 4
RETI Interrupt Return PC STACK I 4
CPSE Rd,Rr Compare, Skip if Equal if (Rd = Rr) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
CP Rd,Rr Compare Rd Rr Z, N,V,C,H 1
CPC Rd,Rr Compare with Carry Rd Rr C Z, N,V,C,H 1
CPI Rd,K Compare Register with Immediate Rd K Z, N,V,C,H 1
SBRC Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register Cleared if (Rr(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBRS R r , b Skip if Bit in Register is Set if (Rr(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBIC P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared if (P(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBIS P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set if (P(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
BRBS s, k Branch if Status Flag Set if (SREG(s) = 1) then PCPC+k + 1 None 1/2
BRBC s, k Branch if Status Flag Cleared if (SREG(s) = 0) then PCPC+k + 1 None 1/2
BREQ k Branch if Equal if (Z = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRNE k Branch if Not Equal if (Z = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRCS k Branch if C arry Set if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRCC k Branch if Carry Cleared if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRSH k Branch if Same or Higher if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRLO k Branch if Lower if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRMI k Branch if Minus if (N = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRPL k Branch if Plus if (N = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRGE k Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed if (N V= 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRLT k Branch if Less Than Zero, Signed if (N V= 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRHS k Branch if Half Carry Flag Set if (H = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRHC k Branch if Half Carry Flag Cleared if (H = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRTS k Branch if T Flag Set if (T = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRTC k Branch if T Flag Cleared if (T = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRVS k Branch if Overflow Flag is Set if (V = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRVC k Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared if (V = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRIE k Branch if Interrupt Enabled if ( I = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRID k Branch if Interrupt Disabled if ( I = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS
SBI P,b Set Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) 1None2
CBI P,b Clear Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) 0None2
LSL Rd Logical Shift Left Rd(n+1) Rd(n), Rd(0) 0 Z,C,N,V 1
LSR Rd Logical Shift Right Rd(n) Rd(n+1), Rd(7) 0 Z,C,N,V 1
ROL Rd Rotate Left Through Carry Rd(0)C,Rd(n+1) Rd(n),CRd(7) Z,C,N,V 1
161
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
ROR Rd Rotate Right Through Carry Rd(7)C,Rd(n) Rd(n+1),CRd(0) Z,C,N,V 1
ASR Rd Arithmetic Shift Right Rd(n) Rd(n+1), n=0..6 Z,C,N,V 1
SWAP Rd Swap Nibbles Rd(3..0)Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4)Rd(3..0) None 1
BSET s Fla g Set SREG(s) 1 SREG(s) 1
BCLR s Flag Clear SREG(s) 0 SREG(s) 1
BST Rr, b Bit Store from Register to T T Rr(b) T 1
BLD Rd, b Bit load from T to Register Rd(b) TNone1
SEC Set Carry C 1C1
CLC Clear Carry C 0 C 1
SEN Set Negative Flag N 1N1
CLN Clear Negative Flag N 0 N 1
SEZ Set Zero Flag Z 1Z1
CLZ Clear Zero Flag Z 0 Z 1
SEI Global Interrupt Enable I 1I1
CLI Global Interrupt Disable I 0 I 1
SES Set Signed Test Flag S 1S1
CLS Clear Signed Test Flag S 0 S 1
SEV Set Twos Complement Overflow. V 1V1
CLV Clear Twos Complement Overflow V 0 V 1
SET Set T in SREG T 1T1
CLT Clear T in SREG T 0 T 1
SEH Set Half Car ry Flag in SREG H 1H1
CLH Clear Half Carry Flag in SREG H 0 H 1
DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS
MOV Rd, Rr Move Between Registers Rd Rr None 1
MOVW Rd, Rr Copy Register Word Rd+1:Rd Rr+1:Rr None 1
LDI Rd, K Load Immediate Rd KNone1
LD Rd, X Load Indirect Rd (X) None 2
LD Rd, X+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd (X), X X + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - X Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. X X - 1, Rd (X) None 2
LD Rd, Y Load Indirect Rd (Y) None 2
LD Rd, Y+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd (Y), Y Y + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - Y Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y Y - 1, Rd (Y) None 2
LDD Rd,Y+q Load Indirect with Displacem en t Rd (Y + q) None 2
LD Rd, Z Load Indirect Rd (Z) Non e 2
LD Rd, Z+ L oad Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd (Z), Z Z+1 None 2
LD Rd, -Z Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z Z - 1, Rd (Z) None 2
LDD Rd, Z+q Load Indir ect with Displacement Rd (Z + q) None 2
LDS Rd, k Load Direct from SRAM Rd (k) None 2
ST X, Rr Store Indirect (X) Rr None 2
ST X+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (X) Rr , X X + 1 None 2
ST - X, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. X X - 1, (X) Rr None 2
ST Y, Rr Store Indirect (Y ) Rr None 2
ST Y+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Y) Rr, Y Y + 1 None 2
ST - Y, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y Y - 1, (Y) Rr None 2
STD Y+q,Rr Store Indirect wit h Displacement (Y + q) Rr None 2
ST Z, Rr Store Indirect (Z) Rr None 2
ST Z+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Z) Rr, Z Z + 1 None 2
ST -Z, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z Z - 1, (Z) Rr None 2
STD Z+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Z + q) Rr None 2
STS k, Rr Store Direct to SRAM (k) Rr None 2
LPM Load Program Me mory R0 (Z) N one 3
LPM Rd, Z Load Program Me mory Rd (Z) N one 3
LPM Rd, Z+ Load Program Memory and Post-Inc Rd (Z), Z Z+1 None 3
SPM Store Program Memory (z) R1:R0 None
IN Rd, P In Port Rd PNone1
OUT P, Rr Out Port P Rr None 1
PUSH Rr Push Register on Stack STACK Rr None 2
POP Rd Pop Register from Stack Rd STACK None 2
MCU CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
NOP No Operation None 1
SLEEP Sleep (see specific descr. for Sleep function) None 1
WDR Watchdog Reset (see specific descr. for WDR/Timer) None 1
BREAK Break For On-chip Debug Only None N/A
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
162 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
22. Ordering Information
Notes: 1. Code indicators: H or 7: NiPdAu lead finish
U, N or F: matte tin
R: tape & reel
2. All packages are Pb-free, halide-free and fully green and they comply with the European directive for Restriction of Hazard-
ous Substances (RoHS).
3. Topside marking for ATtiny13A:
1st Line: T13
2nd Line: Axx
3rd Line: xxx
4. These devices can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering informa-
tion and minimum quantities.
5. For typical and Electrical characteristics for this device please consult Appendix A, ATtiny13A Specification at 105°C.
6. For typical and Electrical characteristics for this device please consult Appendix B, ATtiny13A Specification at 125°C.
Speed (MHz) Power Supply (V) Ordering Code(1) Package(2) Operation Range
20 1.8 - 5.5
ATtiny13A-PU
ATtiny13A-SU
ATtiny13A-SUR
ATtiny13A-SH
ATtiny13A-SHR
ATtiny13A-SSU
ATtiny13A-SSUR
ATtiny13A-SSH
ATtiny13A-SSHR
ATtiny13A-MU
ATtiny13A-MUR
ATtiny13A-MMU(3)
ATtiny13A-MMUR(3)
8P3
8S2
8S2
8S2
8S2
8S1
8S1
8S1
8S1
20M1
20M1
10M1(3)
10M1(3)
Industrial
(-40°C to +85°C)(4)
ATtiny13A-SN
ATtiny13A-SNR
ATtiny13A-SS7
ATtiny13A-SS7R
8S2
8S2
8S1
8S1
Industrial
(-40°C to +105°C)(5)
ATtiny13A-SF
ATtiny13A-SFR
ATtiny13A-MMF
ATtiny13A-MMFR
8S2
8S2
10M1(3)
10M1(3)
Industrial
(-40°C to +125°C)(6)
Package Type
8P3 8-lead, 0.300" Wide, Plastic Dual Inline Package (PDIP)
8S2 8-lead, 0.209" Wide, Plastic Small Outline Package (EIAJ SOIC)
8S1 8-lead, 0.150" Wide, Plastic Gull-Wing Small Outline (JEDEC SOIC)
20M1 20-pad, 4 x 4 x 0.8 mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm, Micro Lead Frame Packag e (MLF)
10M1 10-pad, 3 x 3 x 1 mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm, Micro Lead Frame Package (MLF)
163
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
23. Packaging Information
23.1 8P3
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
8P3, 8-lead, 0.300" Wide Body, Plastic Dual
In-line Package (PDIP)
01/09/02
8P3 B
D
D1
E
E1
e
L
b2
b
A2 A
1
N
eA
c
b3
4 PLCS
Top View
Side View
End View
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = inches)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
Notes: 1. This drawing is for general information only; refer to JEDEC Drawing MS-001, Variation BA for additional information.
2. Dimensions A and L are measured with the package seated in JEDEC seating plane Gauge GS-3.
3. D, D1 and E1 dimensions do not include mold Flash or protrusions. Mold Flash or protrusions shall not exceed 0.010 inch.
4. E and eA measured with the leads constrained to be perpendicular to datum.
5. Pointed or rounded lead tips are preferred to ease insertion.
6. b2 and b3 maximum dimensions do not include Dambar protrusions. Dambar protrusions shall not exceed 0.010 (0.25 mm).
A 0.210 2
A2 0.115 0.130 0.195
b 0.014 0.018 0.022 5
b2 0.045 0.060 0.070 6
b3 0.030 0.039 0.045 6
c 0.008 0.010 0.014
D 0.355 0.365 0.400 3
D1 0.005 3
E 0.300 0.310 0.325 4
E1 0.240 0.250 0.280 3
e 0.100 BSC
eA 0.300 BSC 4
L 0.115 0.130 0.150 2
164 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
23.2 8S2
TITLE DRAWING NO. GPC REV.
Package Drawing Contact:
packagedrawings@atmel.com 8S2STN F
8S2, 8-lead, 0.208” Body, Plastic Small
Outline Package (EIAJ)
4/15/08
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
Notes: 1. This drawing is for general information only; refer to EIAJ Drawing EDR-7320 for additional information.
2. Mismatch of the upper and lower dies and resin burrs aren't included.
3. Determines the true geometric position.
4. Values b,C apply to plated terminal. The standard thickness of the plating layer shall measure between 0.007 to .021 mm.
A 1.70 2.16
A1 0.05 0.25
b 0.35 0.48 4
C 0.15 0.35 4
D 5.13 5.35
E1 5.18 5.40 2
E 7.70 8.26
L 0.51 0.85
θ
e 1.27 BSC 3
θθ
11
NN
EE
TOP VIEWTOP VIEW
CC
E1E1
END VIEWEND VIEW
AA
bb
LL
A1A1
ee
DD
SIDE VIEWSIDE VIEW
165
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
23.3 8S1
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
Note:
2010-10-20
8S1, 8-lead (0.150" Wide Body), Plastic Gull Wing
Small Outline (JEDEC SOIC) 8S1 B
H
1
2
N
3
Top View
C
E
End View
A
B
L
A2
e
D
Side View
4
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
This drawing is for general information only. Refer to JEDEC Drawing MS-012 for proper dimensions, tolerances, datums, etc.
A 1.75
B 0.51
C 0.25
D 5.00
E 4.00
e 1.27 BSC
H 6.20
L 1.27
166 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
23.4 20M1
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
20M1, 20-pad, 4 x 4 x 0.8 mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm, B
20M1
10/27/04
2.6 mm Exposed Pad, Micro Lead Frame Package (MLF)
A 0.70 0.75 0.80
A1 – 0.01 0.05
A2 0.20 REF
b 0.18 0.23 0.30
D 4.00 BSC
D2 2.45 2.60 2.75
E 4.00 BSC
E2 2.45 2.60 2.75
e 0.50 BSC
L 0.35 0.40 0.55
SIDE VIEW
Pin 1 ID
Pin #1
Notch
(0.20 R)
BOTTOM VIEW
TOP VIEW
Note: Reference JEDEC Standard MO-220, Fig. 1 (SAW Singulation) WGGD-5.
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
D
E
e
A2
A1
A
D2
E2
0.08 C
L
1
2
3
b
1
2
3
167
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
23.5 10M1
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
10M1, 10-pad, 3 x 3 x 1.0 mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm,
1.64 x 2.60 mm Exposed Pad, Micro Lead Frame Package A
10M1
7/7/06
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
A 0.80 0.90 1.00
A1 0.00 0.02 0.05
b 0.18 0.25 0.30
D 2.90 3.00 3.10
D1 1.40 1.75
E 2.90 3.00 3.10
E1 2.20 2.70
e 0.50
L 0.30 0.50
y – – 0.08
K 0.20
Pin 1 ID
TOP VIEW
D
E
A1
A
SIDE VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
D1
E1
L
b
e
K
1
2
Notes: 1. This package conforms to JEDEC reference MO-229C, Variation VEED-5.
2. The terminal #1 ID is a Lasser-marked Feature.
y
168 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
24. Errata The revision letters in this section refer to the revision of the ATtiny13A device.
24.1 ATtiny13A Rev. G – H
EEPROM can not be written below 1.9 Volt
1. EEPROM can not be written below 1.9 Volt
Writing the EEPROM at VCC below 1.9 volts might fail.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not write the EEPROM when VCC is below 1.9 volts.
24.2 ATtiny13A Rev. E – F
These device revisions were not sampled.
24.3 ATtiny13 Rev. A – D
These device revisions were referred to as ATtiny13/ATtiny13V.
169
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
25. Datasheet Revision History
Please note that page numbers in this section refer to the current version of this document and
may not apply to previous versions.
25.1 Rev. 8126F – 05/12
1. Updated Table 10-5 on page 57.
2. Updated order codes on page 162.
25.2 Rev. 8126E – 07/10
1. Updated description in Section 6.4.2 “CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register” on page 28.
2. Adjusted notes in Table 18-1, “DC Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C,” on page 117.
3. Updated plot order in Section 19. “Typical Characteristics” on page 124, added some
plots, also some headers and figure titles adjusted.
4. Updated Section 22. “Ordering Infor mation” on page 162, added extended temperatur e
part numbers, as well tape & reel part numbers. Notes adjusted.
5. Updated bit synt ax throughout the datasheet, e.g. from CS02:0 to CS0[2:0].
25.3 Rev. 8126D – 11/09
1. Added note “If the RSTDISPL fuse is programmed...” in Startup-up Times Table 6-5
and Table 6- 6 on page 26.
2. Added addresses in all Register Description tables and cross-references to Register
Summary.
3. Updated naming convention for -COM bits in tables from Table 11-2 on page 70 to
Table 11-7 on page 72 .
4. Updated value for tWD_ERASE in Table 17-8, “Minimum Wait Delay Before Writing the Next
Flash or EEPROM Location,” on page 108.
5. Added NiPdAU note for -SH and -SSH in Section 22. “Ordering Information” on page
162.
25.4 Rev. 8126C – 09/09
1. Added EEPROM errata for rev. G - H on page 168.
2. Added a note abo ut top side marking in Section 22. “Ordering Info rmation” on p age 162.
25.5 Rev. 8126B – 11/08
1. Updated order codes on page 162 to reflect changes in material composition.
2. Updated sections:
“DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0” on page 81
“DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0” on page 95
3. Updated “Registe r Summary” on page 158.
25.6 Rev. 8126A – 05/08
1. Initial revision, created from document 2535I – 04/08.
2. Updated characteristic plots of section “Typical Characteristics” , starting on page 124.
3. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 162.
4. Updated section:
170 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
“Speed” on page 118
5. Update tables:
“DC Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C” on page 117
“Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator” on page 119
“Reset, Brown-out, and Internal Voltage Characteristics” on page 120
“ADC Characteristics, Single Ende d Chan ne ls. TA = -40°C to +85° C” on page 12 1
“Serial Programming Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C” on page 122
6. Added description of new function, “Power Reduction Register”:
Added functional description on page 31
Added bit description on page 34
Added section “Supply Current of I/O Modules” on page 124
Updated Register Summary on page 158
7. Added description of new function, “Software BOD Disable”:
Added functional description on page 31
Updated section on page 32
Added register description on page 33
Updated Register Summary on page 158
8. Added description of enhanced function, “Enhanced Power-On Reset”:
Updated Table 18-4 on page 120, and Table 18-5 on page 120
i
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
Table of Contents
Features..................................................................................................... 1
1 Pin Configurations ................................................................................... 2
1.1 Pin Description ..................................................................................................3
2 Overview ................................................................................................... 4
2.1 B lock Diagram ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ................................... ................... ............4
3 About ......................................................................................................... 6
3.1 Resources .........................................................................................................6
3.2 Code Examples .................................................................................................6
3.3 Data Retention ...................................................................................................6
4CPU Core .................................................................................................. 7
4.1 Architectural Overview .......................................................................................7
4.2 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit ...............................................................................8
4.3 S tatus Regist er ......... ... ... .... ... ... ................ ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .........................8
4.4 General Purpose Register File ........................................................................10
4.5 Stack Pointer ...................................................................................................11
4.6 Inst ruction Execution Timing . ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ...12
4.7 Reset and Interrupt Handling ...........................................................................12
5 Memories ................................................................................................ 15
5.1 In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory .................. ... ... ... .... ... ...15
5.2 S RA M Dat a Memory . ... ... .... ................................... ................... .................... ...15
5.3 EEPROM Data Memory ..................................................................................16
5.4 I/ O Memory ............... ... ... .... ................................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... .............20
5.5 Register Description ................. ... .... ... ... ................... .... ... ... ... ... .................... ...20
6 System Clock and Clock Options ......................................................... 23
6.1 Clock Syst ems and their Distribution ............... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ...... .... ... ...23
6.2 Clock Sources ... .... ... ... ... .... ................... ... ... .................... ... ... .................... ... ...24
6.3 S ys tem Clock Prescaler . .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ...26
6.4 Register Description ................. ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ................... .... ... ... ... .... ... ...27
7 Power Management and Sleep Modes ................................................. 30
7.1 Sleep Modes ....................................................................................................30
7.2 S oftw are BOD Dis able . ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .................... ................... .............31
7.3 Power Reduction Register ...............................................................................31
ii 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
7.4 Minimizing Power Consumption ......................................................................32
7.5 Register Description ................. ... .... ... ... ................... .... ... ... ... ... .................... ...33
8 System Control and Reset .................................................................... 35
8.1 Resetting the AVR ...........................................................................................35
8.2 Reset Sources .................................................................................................36
8.3 Internal Voltage Reference ..............................................................................38
8.4 Watchdog Timer ..............................................................................................38
8.5 Register Description ................. ... .... ... ... ................... .... ... ... ... ... .................... ...42
9 Interrupts ................................................................................................ 45
9.1 Interrupt Vec tors .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ................... .............................45
9.2 External Interrupts ...........................................................................................46
9.3 Register Description ................. ... .... ... ... ................... .... ... ... ... ... .................... ...47
10 I/O Ports .................................................................................................. 49
10.1 Overview ...... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... .... ...... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ....... ......49
10.2 Ports as General Digital I/O .............................................................................50
10.3 Alternate Port Functions ..................................................................................54
10.4 Register Description ....... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .................... ... ... ... .... ... ...57
11 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM ............................................................ 59
11.1 Features ..........................................................................................................59
11.2 Overview ...... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... .... ...... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ....... ......59
11.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources .. ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ...60
11.4 Counter Unit ....................................................................................................60
11.5 Output Compare Unit .......................................................................................61
11.6 Compare Match Output Unit ............................................................................63
11.7 Modes of Operation .........................................................................................64
11.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams .....................................................................68
11.9 Register Description ....... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .................... ... ... ... .... ... ...70
12 Timer/Counter Prescaler ....................................................................... 77
12.1 Overview ...... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... .... ...... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ....... ......77
12.2 Prescaler Reset ...............................................................................................77
12.3 External Clock Source .....................................................................................77
12.4 Register Description. ...... .... ... ... ... .... ................... ... ................... .... ... ................78
13 Analog Comparator ............................................................................... 79
13.1 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input .............................................................79
iii
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
13.2 Register Description ....... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .................... ... ... ... .... ... ...80
14 Analog to Digital Converter .................................................................. 82
14.1 Features ..........................................................................................................82
14.2 Overview ...... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... .... ...... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ....... ......82
14.3 Operation ......................................................................................................... 83
14.4 Starting a Conversion ......................................................................................83
14.5 Prescaling and Conversion Timing ..................................................................84
14.6 Changing Channel or Reference Selection .....................................................87
14.7 ADC Noise Canceler .......................................................................................88
14.8 Analog Input Circuitry ......................................................................................88
14.9 Analog Noise Canceling Techniques ...............................................................89
14.10 ADC Accuracy Definitions ...............................................................................89
14.11 ADC Conversion Result ...................................................................................92
14.12 Register Description .... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .................... ...92
15 debugWIRE On-chip Debug System .................................................... 96
15.1 Features ..........................................................................................................96
15.2 Overview ...... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... .... ...... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ....... ......96
15.3 Physical Interface ........................ .... ... ................... ... .................... ... ... .............96
15.4 Software Break Points ........................ ................... ................... .................... ...97
15.5 Limitations of debugWIRE ...............................................................................97
15.6 Register Description ....... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .................... ... ... ... .... ... ...97
16 Self-Programming the Flash ................................................................. 98
16.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM ......................................................................98
16.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading) ...................................................98
16.3 Performing a Page Write .................................................................................99
16.4 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming .............................................99
16.5 EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR ..............................................100
16.6 Reading Fuse and Lock Bits from Firmware .................................................100
16.7 Preventing Flash Corruption .. ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... .101
16.8 Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM ............................................101
16.9 Register Description ....... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .................... ... ... ... .... ... .102
17 Memory Programming ......................................................................... 103
17.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits ......... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ..............103
17.2 Fuse Bytes ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ................... .................... ... ................... ...........104
17.3 Calibration Bytes ...........................................................................................105
iv 8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
17.4 Signature Bytes .............................................................................................105
17.5 Page Size ......................................................................................................105
17.6 Serial Programming .......................................................................................106
17.7 High-Voltage Serial Programming .................................................................109
17.8 Considerations for Efficient Programming .....................................................113
18 Electrical Characteristics .................................................................... 117
18.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings* .........................................................................117
18.2 DC Characteristics .........................................................................................117
18.3 Speed ............................................................................................................118
18.4 Clock Characteristics ............. ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ................... ... .................... .119
18.5 System and Reset Characteristics ................................................................120
18.6 Analog Comparator Characteristics ...............................................................121
18.7 ADC Characteristics ......................................................................................121
18.8 Serial Programming Characteristics ..............................................................122
18.9 High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics .........................................123
19 Typical Characteristics ........................................................................ 124
19.1 Supply Current of I/O Modules ........... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... .124
19.2 Current Consumption in Active Mode ............................................................125
19.3 Current Consumption in Idle Mode ................................................................128
19.4 Current Consumption in Power-down Mode ..................................................131
19.5 Current Consumption in Reset ......................................................................132
19.6 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units ...................................................... 133
19.7 Pull-up Resistors ...... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ................... ... .................... ... ..............135
19.8 Output Driver Strength (Low Power Pins) .....................................................138
19.9 Output Driver Strength (Regular Pins) ...........................................................141
19.10 Input Thresholds and Hysteresis (for I/O Ports) ............................................147
19.11 BOD, Bandgap and Reset ........... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... .150
19.12 Internal Oscillator Speed ...............................................................................154
20 Register Summary ............................................................................... 158
21 Instruction Set Summary .................................................................... 160
22 Ordering Information ........................................................................... 162
23 Packaging Information ........................................................................ 163
23.1 8P3 ................................................................................................................163
23.2 8S2 ................................................................................................................164
v
8126F–AVR–05/12
ATtiny13A
23.3 8S1 ................................................................................................................165
23.4 20M1 ......... ... ... ... .... ... ................................... .................... ................... ...........166
23.5 10M1 ......... ... ... ... .... ... ................................... .................... ................... ...........167
24 Errata ..................................................................................................... 168
24.1 ATtiny13A Rev. G – H .............. ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .................... .168
24.2 ATtiny13A Rev. E – F ......................... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... .168
24.3 ATtiny13 Rev. A – D ......................................................................................168
25 Datasheet Revision History ................................................................ 169
25.1 Rev. 8126F – 05/12 .......................................................................................169
25.2 Rev. 8126E – 07/10 ..... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ................... ... .................... ... .169
25.3 Rev. 8126D – 11/09 .......................................................................................169
25.4 Rev. 8126C – 09/09 .......................................................................................169
25.5 Rev. 8126B – 11/08 ..... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ................... ... .................... ... .169
25.6 Rev. 8126A – 05/08 ..... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ................... ... .................... ... .169
8126F–AVR–05/12
Headquarters International
Atmel Corporation
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
USA
Tel: (+1)(408) 441-0311
Fax: (+1)(408) 487-2600
Atmel Asia Limited
Unit 01-5 & 16, 19F
BEA Tower, Millennium City 5
418 Kwun Tong Road
Kwun Tong, Kowloon
HONG KONG
Tel: (+852) 2245-6100
Fax: (+852) 2722-1369
Atmel Munich GmbH
Business Campus
Parkring 4
D-85748 Garching b. Munich
GERMANY
Tel: (+49) 89-31970-0
Fax: (+49) 89-3194621
Atmel Japan
9F, Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg.
1-24-8 Shinkawa
Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033
JAPAN
Tel: (+81)(3) 3523-3551
Fax: (+81)(3) 3523-7581
Product Contact
Web Site
www.atmel.com Technical Support
avr@atmel.com Sales Contact
www.atmel.com/contacts
Literature Requests
www.atmel.com/literature
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any
intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN ATMEL’S TERMS AND CONDI-
TIONS OF SALE LOCATED ON ATMEL’S WEB SITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY
WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHA NTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR NO N-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDEN-
TAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERR UPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT
OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no
representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications
and product descrip tions at any time without notice. A tmel does not make any commitment to update the inform ation contained herein. Unless specifically provided
otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in, automotive applicati ons. Atmel’s products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use
as components in applications intended to support or sustain life.
© 2012 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Atmel®, logo and combinations thereof, and others are registered trademarks or trademarks of Atmel Corpor atio n or its subsidiaries. Other terms
and product names may be trademarks of others.